Mercurial > vim
annotate runtime/doc/options.txt @ 2178:c6f1aa1e9f32 vim73
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 16 May 2010 15:46:46 +0200 |
parents | 7c8c7c95a865 |
children | f60a0c9cbe6c |
rev | line source |
---|---|
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2152
diff
changeset
|
1 *options.txt* For Vim version 7.3a. Last change: 2010 May 13 |
7 | 2 |
3 | |
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar | |
5 | |
6 | |
7 Options *options* | |
8 | |
9 1. Setting options |set-option| | |
10 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting| | |
11 3. Options summary |option-summary| | |
12 | |
13 For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|. | |
14 | |
15 Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to | |
16 achieve special effects. These options come in three forms: | |
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle* | |
18 number has a numeric value | |
19 string has a string value | |
20 | |
21 ============================================================================== | |
523 | 22 1. Setting options *set-option* *E764* |
7 | 23 |
24 *:se* *:set* | |
25 :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value. | |
26 | |
27 :se[t] all Show all but terminal options. | |
28 | |
29 :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the | |
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated | |
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal | |
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either... | |
33 | |
34 *E518* *E519* | |
35 :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}. | |
36 | |
37 :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on. | |
38 Number option: show value. | |
39 String option: show value. | |
40 | |
41 :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off. | |
42 | |
2152 | 43 *:set-!* *:set-inv* |
7 | 44 :se[t] {option}! or |
45 :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi} | |
46 | |
47 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim* | |
48 :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the | |
49 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi} | |
50 :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi} | |
51 :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi} | |
52 | |
53 :se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their | |
10 | 54 default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and |
7 | 55 'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi} |
56 | |
57 *:set-args* *E487* *E521* | |
58 :se[t] {option}={value} or | |
59 :se[t] {option}:{value} | |
60 Set string or number option to {value}. | |
61 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal, | |
62 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0') | |
63 (hex and octal are only available for machines which | |
64 have the strtol() function). | |
65 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by | |
66 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is | |
67 set). See |cmdline-completion|. | |
68 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and | |
69 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value} | |
70 is not allowed. | |
71 See |option-backslash| for using white space and | |
72 backslashes in {value}. | |
73 | |
74 :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=* | |
75 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the | |
76 {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
77 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
78 value was empty. | |
79 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags | |
557 | 80 are removed. When adding a flag that was already |
81 present the option value doesn't change. | |
809 | 82 Also see |:set-args| above. |
7 | 83 {not in Vi} |
84 | |
85 :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=* | |
86 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend | |
87 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
88 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
89 value was empty. | |
90 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
91 {not in Vi} | |
92 | |
93 :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=* | |
94 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove | |
95 the {value} from a string option, if it is there. | |
96 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there | |
97 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma | |
98 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option | |
99 becomes empty. | |
100 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be | |
101 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags | |
102 one by one to avoid problems. | |
103 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
104 {not in Vi} | |
105 | |
106 The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: > | |
107 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3 | |
108 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given | |
109 and the following arguments will be ignored. | |
110 | |
111 *:set-verbose* | |
112 When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it | |
113 was last set. Example: > | |
114 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent? | |
1621 | 115 < shiftwidth=4 ~ |
116 Last set from modeline ~ | |
117 cindent ~ | |
118 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim ~ | |
119 This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose | |
120 set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument. | |
121 When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. | |
7 | 122 When the option was set while executing a function, user command or |
123 autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported. | |
124 Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting | |
125 'compatible'. | |
1621 | 126 A few special texts: |
127 Last set from modeline ~ | |
128 Option was set in a |modeline|. | |
129 Last set from --cmd argument ~ | |
130 Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +. | |
131 Last set from -c argument ~ | |
132 Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or | |
133 |-q|. | |
134 Last set from environment variable ~ | |
135 Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT, | |
136 $GVIMINIT or $EXINIT. | |
137 Last set from error handler ~ | |
138 Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error. | |
139 | |
7 | 140 {not available when compiled without the +eval feature} |
141 | |
142 *:set-termcap* *E522* | |
667 | 143 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option. This will |
7 | 144 override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If |
145 the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: > | |
146 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot | |
147 This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For | |
148 example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: > | |
149 :set <M-b>=^[b | |
150 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it) | |
151 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations. | |
152 | |
36 | 153 The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
154 security reasons. | |
155 | |
7 | 156 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put |
10 | 157 at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of |
7 | 158 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the |
159 |more-prompt|. | |
160 | |
161 *option-backslash* | |
162 To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a | |
163 backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this | |
164 means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded | |
165 down). | |
166 A few examples: > | |
167 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags" | |
168 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file" | |
169 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file" | |
170 | |
10 | 171 The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To |
172 include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the | |
7 | 173 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": > |
174 :set titlestring=hi\|there | |
175 This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": > | |
176 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there | |
177 | |
642 | 178 Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment. To include the '"' in |
179 the option value, use '\"' instead. This example sets the 'titlestring' | |
180 option to 'hi "there"': > | |
181 :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\" | |
182 | |
10 | 183 For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More |
7 | 184 precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment |
185 variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not | |
186 removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma, | |
187 etc.) is used like explained above. | |
188 There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": > | |
189 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
190 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
191 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!) | |
192 For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes | |
193 are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be | |
10 | 194 halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a |
7 | 195 result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it. |
196 | |
197 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags* | |
198 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552* | |
199 Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an | |
200 option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: > | |
201 :set guioptions+=a | |
202 Remove a flag from an option like this: > | |
203 :set guioptions-=a | |
204 This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'. | |
10 | 205 Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has |
7 | 206 the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba" |
207 doesn't appear. | |
208 | |
209 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var* | |
22 | 210 Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the |
7 | 211 environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable |
212 name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name | |
213 are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may | |
214 follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is | |
215 appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: > | |
216 :set term=$TERM.new | |
217 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,. | |
218 When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set | |
219 opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing. | |
220 | |
221 | |
222 Handling of local options *local-options* | |
223 | |
224 Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer | |
225 has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This | |
226 allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set | |
227 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another. | |
228 | |
229 The following explains what happens to these local options in specific | |
230 situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses | |
231 the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user | |
232 expects is a bit complicated... | |
233 | |
234 When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus | |
235 right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same. | |
236 | |
237 When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since | |
238 the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer, | |
239 these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a | |
240 global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and | |
241 global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed, | |
242 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer. | |
243 | |
244 When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window | |
245 options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the | |
246 values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where | |
247 the buffer was edited last are used. | |
248 | |
249 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer. | |
250 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep | |
251 using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the | |
252 local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window | |
253 has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but | |
254 global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: > | |
255 :e one | |
256 :set list | |
257 :e two | |
258 Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list" | |
259 command you have also set the global value. > | |
260 :set nolist | |
261 :e one | |
262 :setlocal list | |
263 :e two | |
264 Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global | |
265 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the | |
266 global value. Note that if you do this next: > | |
267 :e one | |
268 You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited | |
10 | 269 "one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer. |
7 | 270 |
271 *:setl* *:setlocal* | |
272 :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the | |
273 current buffer or window. Not all options have a | |
274 local value. If the option does not have a local | |
275 value the global value is set. | |
276 With the "all" argument: display all local option's | |
277 local values. | |
278 Without argument: Display all local option's local | |
279 values which are different from the default. | |
280 When displaying a specific local option, show the | |
1621 | 281 local value. For a global/local boolean option, when |
282 the global value is being used, "--" is displayed | |
283 before the option name. | |
284 For a global option the global value is | |
7 | 285 shown (but that might change in the future). |
286 {not in Vi} | |
287 | |
809 | 288 :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by |
289 copying the value. | |
290 {not in Vi} | |
291 | |
292 :se[t] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by | |
293 making it empty. Only makes sense for |global-local| | |
294 options. | |
7 | 295 {not in Vi} |
296 | |
297 *:setg* *:setglobal* | |
298 :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local | |
299 option without changing the local value. | |
300 When displaying an option, the global value is shown. | |
301 With the "all" argument: display all local option's | |
302 global values. | |
303 Without argument: display all local option's global | |
304 values which are different from the default. | |
305 {not in Vi} | |
306 | |
307 For buffer-local and window-local options: | |
308 Command global value local value ~ | |
309 :set option=value set set | |
310 :setlocal option=value - set | |
311 :setglobal option=value set - | |
312 :set option? - display | |
313 :setlocal option? - display | |
314 :setglobal option? display - | |
315 | |
316 | |
317 Global options with a local value *global-local* | |
318 | |
40 | 319 Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows. |
320 For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. | |
321 You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then | |
322 use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global | |
323 value. | |
7 | 324 |
325 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global | |
326 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: > | |
327 :set makeprg=gmake | |
328 then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set | |
329 the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too. | |
330 However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use | |
1152 | 331 another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source |
10 | 332 files. You use this command: > |
7 | 333 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake |
334 You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: > | |
335 :setlocal makeprg= | |
336 This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the | |
337 "<" flag, like this: > | |
338 :setlocal autoread< | |
339 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the | |
340 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters | |
809 | 341 when the global value changes later). You can also use: > |
342 :set path< | |
343 This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is | |
344 used. Thus it does the same as: > | |
345 :setlocal path= | |
7 | 346 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using |
347 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then. | |
348 | |
349 | |
350 Setting the filetype | |
351 | |
352 :setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype* | |
353 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if | |
354 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands. | |
355 This is short for: > | |
356 :if !did_filetype() | |
357 : setlocal filetype={filetype} | |
358 :endif | |
359 < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid | |
360 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different | |
361 settings and syntax files to be loaded. | |
362 {not in Vi} | |
363 | |
364 :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options* | |
365 :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options. | |
366 Options are grouped by function. | |
367 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the | |
368 short help to open a help window with more help for | |
369 the option. | |
370 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the | |
371 "set" line to set the new value. For window and | |
372 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is | |
373 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help | |
374 window, in which case the window below help window is | |
375 used (skipping the option-window). | |
376 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or | |
377 |+autocmd| features} | |
378 | |
379 *$HOME* | |
380 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an | |
381 option and after a space or comma. | |
382 | |
383 On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory | |
384 of user "user". Example: > | |
385 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,. | |
386 | |
387 On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can | |
388 contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the | |
389 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'. | |
390 | |
391 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set" | |
392 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let". | |
393 | |
394 | |
395 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on | |
396 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. | |
397 | |
398 *:fix* *:fixdel* | |
399 :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD': | |
400 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~ | |
401 CTRL-? CTRL-H | |
402 not CTRL-? CTRL-? | |
403 | |
404 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi} | |
405 | |
406 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the | |
407 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in | |
408 your .vimrc: > | |
409 :fixdel | |
410 < This works no matter what the actual code for | |
411 backspace is. | |
412 | |
413 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can | |
414 use this: > | |
415 :if &term == "termname" | |
416 : set t_kb=^V<BS> | |
417 : fixdel | |
418 :endif | |
419 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key | |
10 | 420 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname" |
7 | 421 with your terminal name. |
422 | |
423 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not | |
424 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: > | |
425 :if &term == "termname" | |
426 : set t_kD=^V<Delete> | |
427 :endif | |
428 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key | |
429 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname" | |
430 with your terminal name. | |
431 | |
432 *Linux-backspace* | |
433 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key | |
434 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by | |
435 putting this line in your rc.local: > | |
436 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys | |
437 < | |
438 *NetBSD-backspace* | |
439 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce | |
440 the right code, try this: > | |
441 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace" | |
442 < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: > | |
443 keysym 22 = BackSpace | |
444 < You need to restart for this to take effect. | |
445 | |
446 ============================================================================== | |
447 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting* | |
448 | |
449 Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives | |
450 to set options automatically for one or more files: | |
451 | |
452 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See | |
453 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions, | |
454 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started. | |
455 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and | |
456 |:mksession|. | |
457 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed. | |
458 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and | |
459 many other things. See |autocommand|. | |
460 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a | |
461 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for | |
462 modelines. This is explained here. | |
463 | |
464 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520* | |
465 There are two forms of modelines. The first form: | |
466 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options} | |
467 | |
468 [text] any text or empty | |
469 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) | |
470 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" | |
471 [white] optional white space | |
472 {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':', | |
473 where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set" | |
1152 | 474 command (can be empty) |
7 | 475 |
782 | 476 Example: |
477 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~ | |
7 | 478 |
479 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi): | |
480 | |
481 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text] | |
482 | |
483 [text] any text or empty | |
484 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) | |
485 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" | |
486 [white] optional white space | |
487 se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space) | |
488 {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the | |
489 argument for a ":set" command | |
490 : a colon | |
491 [text] any text or empty | |
492 | |
782 | 493 Example: |
494 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ | |
7 | 495 |
496 The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance | |
497 that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and | |
498 "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version | |
499 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be | |
500 short for "example:"). | |
501 | |
502 *modeline-local* | |
503 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the | |
11 | 504 buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global |
505 options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and | |
506 the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result | |
507 depends on which one was opened last. | |
7 | 508 |
23 | 509 When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options |
510 from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local | |
511 option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer | |
512 in another window. But window-local options will be set. | |
513 | |
7 | 514 *modeline-version* |
515 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version | |
516 number can be specified where "vim:" is used: | |
517 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later | |
518 vim<{vers}: version before {vers} | |
519 vim={vers}: version {vers} | |
520 vim>{vers}: version after {vers} | |
521 {vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor). | |
782 | 522 For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: |
523 /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */ ~ | |
524 To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: | |
525 /* vim<570: set sw=4: */ ~ | |
7 | 526 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":". |
527 | |
528 | |
529 The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option. | |
530 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked. | |
531 | |
532 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line | |
782 | 533 like: |
534 /* vi:ts=4: */ ~ | |
535 will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: | |
536 /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~ | |
7 | 537 |
538 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped. | |
539 | |
540 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The | |
782 | 541 backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: |
542 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~ | |
7 | 543 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the |
544 ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:". | |
545 | |
546 No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody | |
1111 | 547 might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines). And not all options |
548 can be set. For some options a flag is set, so that when it's used the | |
1152 | 549 |sandbox| is effective. Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline |
1111 | 550 causes trouble. E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines |
551 are wrapped unexpectedly. So disable modelines before editing untrusted text. | |
552 The mail ftplugin does this, for example. | |
7 | 553 |
554 Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could | |
555 define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For | |
556 example: > | |
557 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif | |
558 And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing | |
559 "VAR". | |
560 | |
561 ============================================================================== | |
562 3. Options summary *option-summary* | |
563 | |
564 In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with | |
565 an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used. | |
566 | |
567 In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option" | |
568 is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used. | |
569 | |
570 For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is | |
571 used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when | |
572 'compatible' is set. | |
573 | |
574 Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that | |
10 | 575 are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a |
7 | 576 different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in |
577 one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view | |
578 at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain | |
579 file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example | |
580 the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C | |
581 program. | |
582 | |
583 global one option for all buffers and windows | |
584 local to window each window has its own copy of this option | |
585 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option | |
586 | |
587 When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window | |
588 are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the | |
589 buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the | |
590 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for | |
591 buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is | |
10 | 592 first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer |
593 is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not | |
7 | 594 present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the |
595 buffer is created. | |
596 | |
519 | 597 Hidden options *hidden-options* |
598 | |
599 Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported | |
600 features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces | |
601 below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an | |
602 error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden | |
603 option though, it is not stored. | |
604 | |
605 To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: > | |
606 if exists('&foo') | |
607 This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really | |
608 supported use something like this: > | |
609 if exists('+foo') | |
610 < | |
7 | 611 *E355* |
612 A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. | |
613 | |
614 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph* | |
615 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise) | |
616 global | |
617 {not in Vi} | |
618 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
619 feature} | |
620 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The | |
621 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode | |
622 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_) | |
623 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26]. | |
624 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8. | |
625 See |rileft.txt|. | |
626 | |
627 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'* | |
628 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off) | |
629 global | |
630 {not in Vi} | |
631 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
632 feature} | |
633 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to | |
634 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get | |
635 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See | |
636 'revins'. | |
637 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
638 | |
639 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'* | |
640 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off) | |
641 global | |
642 {not in Vi} | |
643 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi| | |
644 feature} | |
233 | 645 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles |
7 | 646 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set. |
647 | |
233 | 648 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This |
7 | 649 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right |
650 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left | |
10 | 651 mode). See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 652 |
653 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'* | |
654 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single") | |
655 global | |
656 {not in Vi} | |
657 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
658 feature} | |
659 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding. | |
660 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class | |
661 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek | |
662 letters, Cyrillic letters). | |
663 | |
664 There are currently two possible values: | |
233 | 665 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is |
7 | 666 expected by most users. |
667 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters. | |
668 | |
669 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for | |
670 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in | |
671 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro, | |
672 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets, | |
233 | 673 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also |
7 | 674 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text |
233 | 675 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or |
7 | 676 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font |
677 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.), | |
678 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived | |
679 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has | |
680 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP | |
681 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode | |
682 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11). | |
683 | |
684 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'* | |
685 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off) | |
686 global | |
687 {not in Vi} | |
688 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled | |
689 on Mac OS X} | |
690 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X | |
691 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts, | |
692 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays. | |
693 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set | |
694 to its default (empty string). | |
695 | |
696 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'* | |
697 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off) | |
698 global | |
699 {not in Vi} | |
2152 | 700 {only available when compiled with it, use |
701 exists("+autochdir") to check} | |
438 | 702 When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you |
703 open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window. | |
704 It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened | |
705 or selected. | |
706 This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim | |
707 released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition. | |
819 | 708 Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work. |
7 | 709 |
710 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'* | |
711 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off) | |
712 local to window | |
713 {not in Vi} | |
714 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
715 feature} | |
716 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text. | |
717 Setting this option will: | |
718 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
719 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
720 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles | |
721 between typing English and Arabic key mapping. | |
722 - Set the 'delcombine' option | |
723 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text. | |
724 | |
725 Resetting this option will: | |
726 - Reset the 'rightleft' option. | |
727 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value). | |
728 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global | |
729 option. | |
730 Also see |arabic.txt|. | |
731 | |
732 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'* | |
733 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'* | |
734 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on) | |
735 global | |
736 {not in Vi} | |
737 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
738 feature} | |
739 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character | |
740 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language | |
741 take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad | |
742 one which encompasses: | |
743 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location | |
744 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone). | |
745 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters | |
746 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
747 When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
748 form. |
7 | 749 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for |
750 further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
751 | |
752 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'* | |
753 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off) | |
754 local to buffer | |
755 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR> | |
756 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not | |
757 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type | |
1152 | 758 <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor |
759 to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included | |
760 in 'cpoptions'. | |
10 | 761 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you |
762 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first | |
763 line. | |
7 | 764 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in |
765 a different way. | |
766 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set. | |
767 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing | |
768 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the | |
769 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}. | |
770 | |
771 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'* | |
772 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off) | |
773 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
774 {not in Vi} | |
775 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and | |
776 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again. | |
777 When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp| | |
778 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to | |
779 using the global value: > | |
780 :set autoread< | |
781 < | |
782 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'* | |
783 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off) | |
784 global | |
785 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each | |
786 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!, | |
864 | 787 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, |
7 | 788 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file. |
789 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see | |
790 'autowriteall' for that. | |
791 | |
792 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'* | |
793 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off) | |
794 global | |
795 {not in Vi} | |
796 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit", | |
797 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window. | |
798 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has | |
799 been set. | |
800 | |
801 *'background'* *'bg'* | |
802 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light") | |
803 global | |
804 {not in Vi} | |
805 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a | |
806 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that | |
807 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal. | |
808 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used. | |
809 This will not always be correct. | |
810 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim | |
811 what the background color looks like. For changing the background | |
812 color, see |:hi-normal|. | |
813 | |
814 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for | |
10 | 815 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not |
1621 | 816 change. *g:colors_name* |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
817 When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set) |
7 | 818 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If |
819 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work. | |
820 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
821 be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed. |
7 | 822 |
823 When setting 'background' to the default value with: > | |
824 :set background& | |
825 < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly, | |
826 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value. | |
827 | |
828 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be | |
829 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects | |
830 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to | |
831 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read | |
832 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background | |
833 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by | |
834 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value | |
835 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on"). | |
836 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly | |
837 depending on the terminal name. Example: > | |
838 :if &term == "pcterm" | |
839 : set background=dark | |
840 :endif | |
841 < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups | |
842 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER | |
843 the setting of the 'background' option. | |
844 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file | |
845 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this | |
846 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be | |
847 done with ":syntax on". | |
848 | |
849 *'backspace'* *'bs'* | |
850 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "") | |
851 global | |
852 {not in Vi} | |
853 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert | |
854 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows | |
855 a way to backspace over something: | |
856 value effect ~ | |
857 indent allow backspacing over autoindent | |
858 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines) | |
859 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U | |
860 stop once at the start of insert. | |
861 | |
862 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used. | |
863 | |
864 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier: | |
865 value effect ~ | |
866 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible) | |
867 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol" | |
868 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start" | |
869 | |
870 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want. | |
871 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. | |
872 | |
873 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'* | |
874 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off) | |
875 global | |
876 {not in Vi} | |
877 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the | |
878 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the | |
879 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being | |
880 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is | |
881 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both | |
10 | 882 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the |
7 | 883 |backup-table| for more explanations. |
884 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. | |
885 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the | |
886 oldest version of a file. | |
887 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
888 | |
889 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'* | |
890 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto") | |
891 global | |
892 {not in Vi} | |
893 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's | |
894 done. This is a comma separated list of words. | |
895 | |
896 The main values are: | |
897 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one | |
898 "no" rename the file and write a new one | |
899 "auto" one of the previous, what works best | |
900 | |
901 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are: | |
902 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing | |
903 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing | |
904 | |
905 Making a copy and overwriting the original file: | |
906 - Takes extra time to copy the file. | |
907 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or | |
908 has a resource fork, all this is preserved. | |
909 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link, | |
910 not of the real file. | |
911 | |
912 Renaming the file and writing a new one: | |
913 + It's fast. | |
914 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new | |
915 file. | |
916 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link. | |
917 | |
918 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file | |
919 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and | |
1152 | 920 the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected, a |
921 copy will be made. | |
7 | 922 |
923 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in | |
924 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they | |
925 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing | |
926 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to | |
927 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be | |
928 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or | |
929 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not | |
930 be propagated back to the original source. | |
931 *crontab* | |
932 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program | |
933 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if | |
934 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the | |
10 | 935 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an |
7 | 936 example. |
937 | |
938 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled | |
939 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and | |
940 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file | |
10 | 941 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The |
7 | 942 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this |
943 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for | |
944 others. | |
945 | |
946 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has | |
947 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file | |
948 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic) | |
949 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't | |
950 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly | |
951 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but | |
952 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will | |
953 again not rename the file. | |
954 | |
955 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'* | |
956 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
957 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp" | |
958 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/") | |
959 global | |
960 {not in Vi} | |
961 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas. | |
962 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
963 where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
964 create it for you. |
7 | 965 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is |
966 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this. | |
967 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory | |
968 as the edited file. | |
33 | 969 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 970 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The |
971 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
972 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning). | |
973 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part | |
974 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
975 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
976 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
977 - A directory name may end in an '/'. | |
978 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
979 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
980 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
981 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
982 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
983 of the option is removed. | |
984 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options. | |
985 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: > | |
986 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp | |
987 < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your | |
988 home directory for this to work properly. | |
989 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
990 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
991 uses another default. | |
992 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
993 security reasons. | |
994 | |
995 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589* | |
996 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_") | |
997 global | |
998 {not in Vi} | |
999 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the | |
1000 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids | |
1001 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might | |
1002 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with | |
1003 ".bak" that you want to keep. | |
36 | 1004 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 1005 |
26 | 1006 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre |
1007 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to | |
1008 include a timestamp. > | |
1009 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~' | |
1010 < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory. | |
1011 | |
7 | 1012 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'* |
1013 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*") | |
1014 global | |
1015 {not in Vi} | |
1016 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
1017 feature} | |
1018 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the | |
1019 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both | |
1020 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used. | |
1021 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. | |
1022 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|. | |
1023 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the | |
233 | 1024 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix. |
1152 | 1025 |
1026 Note that environment variables are not expanded. If you want to use | |
1027 $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: > | |
1028 :let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*' | |
1029 | |
1030 < Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a | |
557 | 1031 backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see |
1032 the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|. | |
7 | 1033 |
1034 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'* | |
1035 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600) | |
1036 global | |
1037 {not in Vi} | |
1038 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1039 feature} | |
1040 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|. | |
1041 | |
1042 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'* | |
1043 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off) | |
1044 global | |
1045 {not in Vi} | |
1046 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
189 | 1047 feature} |
7 | 1048 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality. |
1049 | |
189 | 1050 *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'* |
1051 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "") | |
790 | 1052 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
189 | 1053 {not in Vi} |
1054 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1055 feature} | |
782 | 1056 Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used |
1057 when 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used: | |
189 | 1058 |
1059 v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show | |
1060 v:beval_winnr number of the window | |
1061 v:beval_lnum line number | |
1062 v:beval_col column number (byte index) | |
1063 v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer | |
1064 | |
1065 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! | |
1066 Example: > | |
1067 function! MyBalloonExpr() | |
435 | 1068 return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum . |
189 | 1069 \', column ' . v:beval_col . |
1070 \ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) . | |
1071 \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"' | |
1072 endfunction | |
1073 set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr() | |
1074 set ballooneval | |
1075 < | |
1076 NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text | |
1077 character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty, | |
1078 Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans | |
1079 or Sun Workshop). | |
1080 | |
634 | 1081 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
1082 |sandbox-option|. | |
1083 | |
1084 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
1085 evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|. | |
1086 | |
446 | 1087 To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: > |
435 | 1088 if has("balloon_multiline") |
714 | 1089 < When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line. If the |
1090 expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item | |
1091 as a string and putting "\n" in between them. | |
1092 | |
7 | 1093 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'* |
1094 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off) | |
1095 local to buffer | |
1096 {not in Vi} | |
1097 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also | |
1098 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few | |
1099 options will be changed (also when it already was on): | |
1100 'textwidth' will be set to 0 | |
1101 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0 | |
1102 'modeline' will be off | |
1103 'expandtab' will be off | |
1104 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the | |
1105 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL> | |
1106 separates lines). | |
1107 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the | |
1108 file is read without conversion. | |
1109 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is | |
1110 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g., | |
1111 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set | |
1112 'bin' again when the file has been loaded. | |
1113 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when | |
1114 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of | |
1115 saved option values. | |
1116 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument. | |
1117 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all | |
1118 files you edit. | |
1119 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if | |
1120 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to | |
1121 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See | |
1122 the 'endofline' option. | |
1123 | |
1124 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'* | |
1125 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on) | |
1126 global | |
1127 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
446 | 1128 When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works |
7 | 1129 better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a |
1130 terminal over a serial port reset this option. | |
1131 Also see |'conskey'|. | |
1132 | |
1133 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'* | |
1134 'bomb' boolean (default off) | |
1135 local to buffer | |
1136 {not in Vi} | |
1137 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
1138 feature} | |
1139 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte | |
1140 Order Mark) is prepended to the file: | |
1141 - this option is on | |
1142 - the 'binary' option is off | |
1143 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big | |
1144 endian variants. | |
1145 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file. | |
1146 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it | |
1147 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1148 appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM. |
7 | 1149 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a |
1150 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly. | |
1151 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you | |
1152 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM | |
1153 will be restored when writing the file. | |
1154 | |
1155 *'breakat'* *'brk'* | |
1156 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?") | |
1157 global | |
1158 {not in Vi} | |
1159 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
1160 feature} | |
1161 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line | |
500 | 1162 break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit |
1163 characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding. | |
7 | 1164 |
1165 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'* | |
29 | 1166 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last") |
7 | 1167 global |
1621 | 1168 {not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and |
1169 Win32 GUI} | |
7 | 1170 Which directory to use for the file browser: |
1621 | 1171 last Use same directory as with last file browser, where a |
1172 file was opened or saved. | |
7 | 1173 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer. |
1174 current Use the current directory. | |
1175 {path} Use the specified directory | |
1176 | |
1177 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'* | |
1178 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "") | |
1179 local to buffer | |
1180 {not in Vi} | |
1181 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
1182 feature} | |
1183 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer | |
1184 displayed in a window: | |
1185 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option | |
1186 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden' | |
1187 is not set | |
1188 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using | |
1189 |:hide| | |
1190 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1191 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1192 |:bdelete| | |
1193 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1194 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1195 |:bwipeout| | |
1196 | |
82 | 1197 CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer |
1198 are lost without a warning. | |
7 | 1199 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify |
1200 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1201 | |
1202 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85* | |
1203 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on) | |
1204 local to buffer | |
1205 {not in Vi} | |
1206 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If | |
1207 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc. | |
1208 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember | |
1209 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer. | |
1210 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer". | |
1211 | |
1212 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382* | |
1213 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "") | |
1214 local to buffer | |
1215 {not in Vi} | |
1216 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
1217 feature} | |
1218 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer: | |
1219 <empty> normal buffer | |
1220 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be | |
1221 written | |
1222 nowrite buffer which will not be written | |
17 | 1223 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd |
856 | 1224 autocommands. {not available when compiled without the |
17 | 1225 |+autocmd| feature} |
7 | 1226 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow| |
648 | 1227 or list of locations |:lwindow| |
7 | 1228 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this |
1229 manually) | |
1230 | |
1231 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to | |
1232 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1233 | |
1234 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects! | |
1235 | |
648 | 1236 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location |
1237 list. This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and | |
1238 you are not supposed to change it. | |
7 | 1239 |
1240 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar: | |
1241 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't | |
1242 work (":w filename" does work though). | |
1243 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|. | |
1244 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for | |
1245 example when you quit Vim. | |
1246 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory | |
1247 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap | |
1248 file). | |
1249 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a | |
1250 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd| | |
1251 command. | |
17 | 1252 *E676* |
1253 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like | |
1254 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and | |
1255 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned | |
1256 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|, | |
1257 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands. | |
7 | 1258 |
1259 *'casemap'* *'cmp'* | |
1260 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii") | |
1261 global | |
1262 {not in Vi} | |
804 | 1263 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
1264 feature} | |
7 | 1265 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain |
1266 these words, separated by a comma: | |
1267 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current | |
1268 locale does not change the case mapping. This only | |
493 | 1269 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding, |
1270 "latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is | |
1271 omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library | |
1272 functions are used when available. | |
7 | 1273 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US |
1274 case mapping, the current locale is not effective. | |
1275 This probably only matters for Turkish. | |
1276 | |
1277 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346* | |
1278 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,") | |
1279 global | |
1280 {not in Vi} | |
1281 {not available when compiled without the | |
1282 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
1283 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1284 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched | |
1668 | 1285 for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./" |
1286 or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then. | |
7 | 1287 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as |
1288 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|. | |
1289 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look | |
1290 in the current directory first. | |
1291 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include | |
1292 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to | |
1293 override it: > | |
1294 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g') | |
1295 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1296 security reasons. | |
1297 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names). | |
1298 | |
1299 *'cedit'* | |
1300 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F) | |
1301 global | |
1302 {not in Vi} | |
1303 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1304 feature} | |
1305 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window. | |
1306 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off. | |
1307 Only non-printable keys are allowed. | |
1308 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to | |
1309 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: > | |
1310 :set cedit=<C-Y> | |
1311 :set cedit=<Esc> | |
1312 < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character. | |
1313 See |cmdwin|. | |
1314 | |
1315 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513* | |
1316 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "") | |
1317 global | |
1318 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
1319 feature and the |+eval| feature} | |
1320 {not in Vi} | |
1321 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is | |
1322 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a | |
1323 different encoding from what is desired. | |
1324 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is | |
1325 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is | |
1326 preferred, because it is much faster. | |
1327 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no | |
1328 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first. | |
1329 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success, | |
1330 non-zero for failure. | |
1331 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'. | |
1332 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are | |
1333 used. | |
1334 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8" | |
1335 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this. | |
1336 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c' | |
1337 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion. | |
1338 Example: > | |
1339 set charconvert=CharConvert() | |
1340 fun CharConvert() | |
1341 system("recode " | |
1342 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to | |
1343 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out) | |
1344 return v:shell_error | |
1345 endfun | |
1346 < The related Vim variables are: | |
1347 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding | |
1348 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding | |
1349 v:fname_in name of the input file | |
1350 v:fname_out name of the output file | |
1351 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same. | |
1352 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different | |
1353 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4. | |
1354 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want | |
1355 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care | |
1356 of this. | |
1357 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1358 security reasons. | |
1359 | |
1360 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'* | |
1361 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off) | |
1362 local to buffer | |
1363 {not in Vi} | |
1364 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1365 feature} | |
1621 | 1366 Enables automatic C program indenting. See 'cinkeys' to set the keys |
7 | 1367 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your |
1368 preferred indent style. | |
1369 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'. | |
1370 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty, | |
1371 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an | |
1372 external program. | |
1373 See |C-indenting|. | |
1374 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent' | |
1375 option or 'indentexpr'. | |
1376 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
1377 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
1378 | |
1379 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'* | |
1380 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
1381 local to buffer | |
1382 {not in Vi} | |
1383 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1384 feature} | |
1385 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
1386 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is | |
1387 empty. | |
1388 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|. | |
1389 See |C-indenting|. | |
1390 | |
1391 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'* | |
1392 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "") | |
1393 local to buffer | |
1394 {not in Vi} | |
1395 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1396 feature} | |
1397 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C | |
1398 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and | |
1399 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general. | |
1400 | |
1401 | |
1402 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'* | |
1403 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch") | |
1404 local to buffer | |
1405 {not in Vi} | |
1406 {not available when compiled without both the | |
1407 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features} | |
1408 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when | |
1409 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at | |
1410 an appropriate place (inside {}). | |
1411 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't | |
1412 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase: | |
1413 "if,If,IF". | |
1414 | |
1415 *'clipboard'* *'cb'* | |
1416 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux" | |
1417 for X-windows, "" otherwise) | |
1418 global | |
1419 {not in Vi} | |
1420 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard| | |
1421 feature is included} | |
1422 This option is a list of comma separated names. | |
1423 These names are recognized: | |
1424 | |
1425 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*' | |
1426 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which | |
1427 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a | |
1428 register is explicitly specified, it will always be | |
1429 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard' | |
1430 or not. The clipboard register can always be | |
1431 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see | |
1432 |gui-clipboard|. | |
1433 | |
1434 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present, | |
1435 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual | |
1436 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the | |
1437 windowing system's global selection or put the | |
1438 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection | |
1439 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for | |
1440 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in | |
1441 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this | |
1442 "autoselect" flag is used. | |
1443 Also applies to the modeless selection. | |
1444 | |
1445 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection | |
1446 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
1447 | |
1904 | 1448 html When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when |
1449 pasting. When putting text on the clipboard, mark it | |
1450 as HTML. This works to copy rendered HTML from | |
1451 Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML | |
1452 in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox. | |
1453 Only supported for GTK version 2 and later. | |
1454 Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature. | |
1455 | |
7 | 1456 exclude:{pattern} |
1457 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of | |
1458 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no | |
1459 connection will be made to the X server. This is | |
1460 useful in this situation: | |
1461 - Running Vim in a console. | |
1462 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another | |
1463 display. | |
1464 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the | |
1465 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator. | |
1466 To never connect to the X server use: > | |
1467 exclude:.* | |
1468 < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument. | |
1469 Note that when there is no connection to the X server | |
1470 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard | |
1471 cannot be accessed. | |
1472 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is | |
1473 interpreted as if 'magic' was on. | |
1474 The rest of the option value will be used for | |
1475 {pattern}, this must be the last entry. | |
1476 | |
1477 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'* | |
1478 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1) | |
1479 global | |
1480 {not in Vi} | |
1481 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding | |
1482 |hit-enter| prompts. | |
824 | 1483 The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab |
1484 page can have a different value. | |
7 | 1485 |
1486 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'* | |
1487 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7) | |
1488 global | |
1489 {not in Vi} | |
1490 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1491 feature} | |
1492 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin| | |
1493 | |
1494 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594* | |
1495 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width) | |
1496 global | |
1497 {not in Vi} | |
1498 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal | |
161 | 1499 initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see |
1500 |posix-screen-size|. | |
7 | 1501 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
1502 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
1503 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
1504 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical | |
1152 | 1505 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up. For |
1506 the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to | |
1507 what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the widest | |
1508 window possible: > | |
1509 :set columns=9999 | |
1510 < Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000. | |
7 | 1511 |
1512 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525* | |
1513 'comments' 'com' string (default | |
1514 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-") | |
1515 local to buffer | |
1516 {not in Vi} | |
1517 {not available when compiled without the |+comments| | |
1518 feature} | |
1519 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See | |
1520 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to | |
1521 insert a space. | |
1522 | |
1523 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537* | |
1524 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/") | |
1525 local to buffer | |
1526 {not in Vi} | |
1527 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
1528 feature} | |
1529 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the | |
1530 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see | |
1531 |fold-marker|. | |
1532 | |
1533 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'* | |
819 | 1534 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| |
1535 file is found) | |
7 | 1536 global |
1537 {not in Vi} | |
1538 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or | |
1539 make Vim behave in a more useful way. | |
1540 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset, | |
1541 other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or | |
1542 resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings | |
10 | 1543 are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you |
7 | 1544 set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the |
1545 very start. | |
1546 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the | |
1547 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim | |
1548 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible' | |
1549 option. | |
819 | 1550 When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up, |
378 | 1551 this option is switched off, and all options that have not been |
1552 modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means | |
819 | 1553 that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim |
378 | 1554 defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't |
1152 | 1555 happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given |
1556 with the |-u| argument). Also see |compatible-default| and | |
1557 |posix-compliance|. | |
7 | 1558 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with |
1559 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|. | |
1560 Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options | |
1561 that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options | |
1562 marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified. | |
1563 At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set | |
1564 or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table | |
10 | 1565 below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible |
7 | 1566 editing. |
1567 See also 'cpoptions'. | |
1568 | |
1569 option + set value effect ~ | |
1570 | |
1571 'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command | |
1572 'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy | |
1573 others: "auto" copy or rename backup file | |
1574 'backspace' "" normal backspace | |
1575 'backup' off no backup file | |
1576 'cindent' off no C code indentation | |
1577 'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin| | |
1578 'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags | |
1579 'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag" | |
1580 'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder| | |
1581 'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose| | |
1582 'digraph' off no digraphs | |
1583 'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode | |
1584 'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces | |
1585 'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection, | |
1586 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2 | |
1587 'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting | |
1588 'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s" | |
1589 'history' + 0 no commandline history | |
1590 'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1591 'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1592 'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches | |
1593 'incsearch' off no incremental searching | |
1594 'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression | |
1595 'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode | |
1596 'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric | |
1597 characters and '_' | |
1598 'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period | |
1599 'modeline' + off no modelines | |
1600 'more' + off no pauses in listings | |
1601 'revins' off no reverse insert | |
1602 'ruler' off no ruler | |
1603 'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll | |
1604 'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset | |
1605 'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth | |
1606 'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages | |
1607 'showcmd' + off command characters not shown | |
1608 'showmode' + off current mode not shown | |
1609 'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch | |
1610 'smartindent' off no smart indentation | |
1611 'smarttab' off no smart tab size | |
1612 'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions | |
1613 'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands | |
1614 'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative | |
1615 'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection | |
1616 'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap | |
1617 'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator | |
1618 'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout | |
1619 'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap | |
1620 'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab> | |
1621 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion | |
1622 'writebackup' on or off depends on +writebackup feature | |
1623 | |
1624 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535* | |
1625 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i") | |
1626 local to buffer | |
1627 {not in Vi} | |
1628 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works | |
1629 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line | |
1630 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion | |
1631 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags: | |
1632 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored) | |
1633 w scan buffers from other windows | |
1634 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1635 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1636 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list | |
1637 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option | |
703 | 1638 kspell use the currently active spell checking |spell| |
7 | 1639 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given, |
1640 patterns are valid too. For example: > | |
1641 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish | |
1642 < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option | |
1643 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns | |
1644 are valid too. | |
1645 i scan current and included files | |
1646 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro | |
1647 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| | |
1648 ] tag completion | |
1649 t same as "]" | |
1650 | |
1651 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are | |
1652 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files | |
1653 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for | |
1654 whole-line completion. | |
1655 | |
1656 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan: | |
1657 1. the current buffer | |
1658 2. buffers in other windows | |
1659 3. other loaded buffers | |
1660 4. unloaded buffers | |
1661 5. tags | |
1662 6. included files | |
1663 | |
1664 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'- | |
233 | 1665 based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns |
1666 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions). | |
7 | 1667 |
12 | 1668 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'* |
1669 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty) | |
1670 local to buffer | |
1671 {not in Vi} | |
452 | 1672 {not available when compiled without the +eval |
1673 or +insert_expand feature} | |
623 | 1674 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion |
1675 with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| | |
648 | 1676 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
1677 invoked and what it should return. | |
1678 | |
14 | 1679 |
540 | 1680 *'completeopt'* *'cot'* |
730 | 1681 'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu,preview") |
540 | 1682 global |
766 | 1683 {not available when compiled without the |
1684 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
540 | 1685 {not in Vi} |
665 | 1686 A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion |
1687 |ins-completion|. The supported values are: | |
540 | 1688 |
1689 menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The | |
1690 menu is only shown when there is more than one match and | |
1691 sufficient colors are available. |ins-completion-menu| | |
1692 | |
707 | 1693 menuone Use the popup menu also when there is only one match. |
856 | 1694 Useful when there is additional information about the |
707 | 1695 match, e.g., what file it comes from. |
1696 | |
836 | 1697 longest Only insert the longest common text of the matches. If |
1698 the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more | |
1699 characters. Whether case is ignored depends on the kind | |
1700 of completion. For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is | |
1701 used. | |
665 | 1702 |
730 | 1703 preview Show extra information about the currently selected |
1152 | 1704 completion in the preview window. Only works in |
1705 combination with "menu" or "menuone". | |
1706 | |
730 | 1707 |
7 | 1708 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'* |
1709 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off) | |
1710 global | |
1711 {not in Vi} | |
1712 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally | |
1713 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e", | |
1714 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current | |
1715 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer. | |
1716 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one | |
1717 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm| | |
1718 command. | |
1719 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
1720 | |
1721 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'* | |
1722 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off) | |
1723 global | |
1724 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
1725 When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character. | |
10 | 1726 This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together, |
7 | 1727 three methods of console input are available: |
1728 'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~ | |
1729 on on or off direct console input | |
1730 off on BIOS | |
1731 off off STDIN | |
1732 | |
1733 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'* | |
1734 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off) | |
1735 local to buffer | |
1736 {not in Vi} | |
1737 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a | |
1738 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of | |
1739 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled, | |
1740 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the | |
1741 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the | |
1621 | 1742 existing line. 'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab |
1743 remains a Tab. If the new indent is greater than on the existing | |
7 | 1744 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner. |
1745 NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
1746 Also see 'preserveindent'. | |
1747 | |
1748 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* | |
1749 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs", | |
1750 Vi default: all flags) | |
1751 global | |
1752 {not in Vi} | |
1753 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present | |
10 | 1754 this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where |
7 | 1755 not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred. |
1756 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options". | |
1757 Commas can be added for readability. | |
1758 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
1759 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
1760 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
1761 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
164 | 1762 NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when |
1763 the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1764 variable exists |posix|. This means Vim tries to behave like the |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1765 POSIX specification. |
7 | 1766 |
1767 contains behavior ~ | |
1768 *cpo-a* | |
1769 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
1770 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
1771 current window. | |
1772 *cpo-A* | |
1773 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
1774 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
1775 current window. | |
1776 *cpo-b* | |
1777 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of | |
1778 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping, | |
1779 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next | |
1780 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to | |
1781 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all | |
1782 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands. | |
1783 See also |map_bar|. | |
1784 *cpo-B* | |
1785 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings, | |
1786 abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands. | |
1787 Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a | |
1788 CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>" | |
1789 results in X being mapped to: | |
1790 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>) | |
1791 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters) | |
1792 ('<' excluded in both cases) | |
1793 *cpo-c* | |
1794 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the | |
1795 cursor position, but not further than the start of the | |
1796 next line. When not present searching continues | |
1797 one character from the cursor position. With 'c' | |
1798 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating | |
1799 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches. | |
1800 *cpo-C* | |
1801 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a | |
1802 backslash. See |line-continuation|. | |
1803 *cpo-d* | |
1804 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use | |
1805 the tags file relative to the current file, but the | |
1806 tags file in the current directory. | |
1807 *cpo-D* | |
1808 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode | |
1809 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and | |
1810 |t|. | |
1811 *cpo-e* | |
1812 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a | |
1813 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not | |
1814 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register | |
1815 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a | |
1816 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line | |
1817 and can be edited before hitting <CR>. | |
1818 *cpo-E* | |
1819 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or | |
1820 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when | |
1821 at least one character is to be operate on. Example: | |
1822 This makes "y0" fail in the first column. | |
1823 *cpo-f* | |
1824 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
1825 argument will set the file name for the current buffer, | |
1826 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet. | |
1827 *cpo-F* | |
1828 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
1829 argument will set the file name for the current | |
1830 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name | |
590 | 1831 yet. Also see |cpo-P|. |
7 | 1832 *cpo-g* |
1833 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument. | |
164 | 1834 *cpo-H* |
1835 H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert | |
1836 before the last blank. Without this flag insert after | |
1837 the last blank. | |
7 | 1838 *cpo-i* |
1839 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will | |
1840 leave it modified. | |
10 | 1841 *cpo-I* |
1842 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting | |
1843 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent. | |
7 | 1844 *cpo-j* |
1845 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.', | |
1846 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'. | |
1847 *cpo-J* | |
1848 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after | |
233 | 1849 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as |
7 | 1850 white space. |
1851 *cpo-k* | |
1852 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in | |
1853 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu | |
1854 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[ | |
1855 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X | |
1856 being mapped to: | |
1857 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters) | |
1858 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code) | |
1859 Also see the '<' flag below. | |
1860 *cpo-K* | |
1861 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is | |
1862 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when | |
1863 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It | |
1864 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>. | |
1865 *cpo-l* | |
1866 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
168 | 1867 literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special. |
1868 See |/[]| | |
7 | 1869 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't' |
1870 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab> | |
168 | 1871 Also see |cpo-\|. |
7 | 1872 *cpo-L* |
1873 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin', | |
1874 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode | |
1875 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of | |
1876 the normal behavior of a <Tab>. | |
1877 *cpo-m* | |
1878 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a | |
1879 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half | |
1880 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'| | |
1881 *cpo-M* | |
1882 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into | |
1883 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer | |
1884 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores | |
1885 backslashes, which is Vi compatible. | |
1886 *cpo-n* | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1887 n When included, the column used for 'number' and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1888 'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1889 lines. |
7 | 1890 *cpo-o* |
1891 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for | |
1892 next search. | |
1893 *cpo-O* | |
1894 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even | |
1895 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a | |
1896 protection against a file unexpectedly created by | |
1897 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this. | |
1898 *cpo-p* | |
1899 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a | |
1900 slightly better algorithm is used. | |
590 | 1901 *cpo-P* |
1902 P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a | |
1903 file will set the file name for the current buffer, if | |
1904 the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and | |
1905 the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|. | |
164 | 1906 *cpo-q* |
1907 q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the | |
1908 position where it would be when joining two lines. | |
7 | 1909 *cpo-r* |
1910 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search | |
1911 command, instead of the actually used search string. | |
1912 *cpo-R* | |
1913 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag | |
1914 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used. | |
1915 *cpo-s* | |
1916 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the | |
1917 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0. | |
10 | 1918 And it is the default. If not present the options are |
7 | 1919 set when the buffer is created. |
1920 *cpo-S* | |
1921 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer | |
1922 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and | |
1923 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting. | |
1924 The options are set to the values in the current | |
1925 buffer. When you change an option and go to another | |
1926 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the | |
1927 buffer options global to all buffers. | |
1928 | |
1929 's' 'S' copy buffer options | |
1930 no no when buffer created | |
1931 yes no when buffer first entered (default) | |
1932 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.) | |
1933 *cpo-t* | |
1934 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for | |
1935 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in | |
1936 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the | |
1937 last used search pattern. | |
1938 *cpo-u* | |
10 | 1939 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|. |
7 | 1940 *cpo-v* |
1941 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in | |
1942 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are | |
1943 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the | |
1944 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced | |
1945 characters. | |
1946 *cpo-w* | |
1947 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one | |
1948 character and not all blanks until the start of the | |
1949 next word. | |
1950 *cpo-W* | |
1951 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!" | |
1952 overwrites a readonly file, if possible. | |
1953 *cpo-x* | |
1954 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line. | |
1955 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line, | |
1956 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>| | |
164 | 1957 *cpo-X* |
1958 X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is | |
1959 deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "." | |
1960 and a count. | |
7 | 1961 *cpo-y* |
1962 y A yank command can be redone with ".". | |
164 | 1963 *cpo-Z* |
1964 Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set, | |
1965 don't reset 'readonly'. | |
7 | 1966 *cpo-!* |
1967 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used | |
1968 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last | |
1969 used -filter- command is used. | |
1970 *cpo-$* | |
1971 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the | |
1972 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text. | |
1973 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the | |
1974 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any | |
1975 command that moves the cursor from the insertion | |
1976 point. | |
1977 *cpo-%* | |
1978 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command. | |
1979 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc. | |
1980 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/". | |
1981 Parens inside single and double quotes are also | |
1982 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to | |
1983 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like | |
1984 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not | |
1985 match the last one. When this flag is not included, | |
1986 parens inside single and double quotes are treated | |
1987 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes, | |
1988 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a | |
1989 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if | |
10 | 1990 there is one). This works very well for C programs. |
36 | 1991 This flag is also used for other features, such as |
1992 C-indenting. | |
161 | 1993 *cpo--* |
1994 - When included, a vertical movement command fails when | |
632 | 1995 it would go above the first line or below the last |
1996 line. Without it the cursor moves to the first or | |
1997 last line, unless it already was in that line. | |
161 | 1998 Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j", |
632 | 1999 CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234". |
39 | 2000 *cpo-+* |
2001 + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the | |
2002 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer | |
2003 itself may still be different from its file. | |
856 | 2004 *cpo-star* |
7 | 2005 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included, |
2006 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area. | |
2007 *cpo-<* | |
2008 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>| | |
2009 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of | |
10 | 2010 menu commands. For example, the command |
7 | 2011 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to: |
2012 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters) | |
2013 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>) | |
2014 Also see the 'k' flag above. | |
164 | 2015 *cpo->* |
2016 > When appending to a register, put a line break before | |
2017 the appended text. | |
2018 | |
2019 POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except | |
2020 when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix| | |
2021 | |
2022 contains behavior ~ | |
856 | 2023 *cpo-#* |
164 | 2024 # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect. |
168 | 2025 *cpo-&* |
2026 & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when | |
2027 exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded. | |
2028 This flag is tested when exiting. | |
2029 *cpo-\* | |
2030 \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
2031 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]| | |
488 | 2032 '\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-' |
2033 '\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-' | |
2034 Also see |cpo-l|. | |
168 | 2035 *cpo-/* |
2036 / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s| | |
2037 command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%| | |
164 | 2038 *cpo-{* |
2039 { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character | |
2040 at the start of a line. | |
168 | 2041 *cpo-.* |
2042 . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current | |
2043 buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't | |
2044 need this, since it remembers the full path of an | |
2045 opened file. | |
164 | 2046 *cpo-bar* |
2047 | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment | |
2048 variables overrule the terminal size values obtained | |
2049 with system specific functions. | |
2050 | |
7 | 2051 |
2052 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'* | |
2053 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0) | |
2054 global | |
2055 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2056 feature} | |
2057 {not in Vi} | |
2058 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags. | |
2059 See |cscopepathcomp|. | |
2060 | |
2061 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'* | |
2062 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope") | |
2063 global | |
2064 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2065 feature} | |
2066 {not in Vi} | |
2067 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|. | |
2068 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2069 security reasons. | |
2070 | |
2071 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'* | |
2072 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "") | |
2073 global | |
2074 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2075 or |+quickfix| features} | |
2076 {not in Vi} | |
2077 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results. | |
2078 See |cscopequickfix|. | |
2079 | |
2080 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'* | |
2081 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off) | |
2082 global | |
2083 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2084 feature} | |
2085 {not in Vi} | |
2086 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|. | |
2087 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2088 | |
2089 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'* | |
2090 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0) | |
2091 global | |
2092 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2093 feature} | |
2094 {not in Vi} | |
2095 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See | |
2096 |cscopetagorder|. | |
2097 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
2098 | |
2099 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'* | |
2100 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'* | |
2101 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off) | |
2102 global | |
2103 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2104 feature} | |
2105 {not in Vi} | |
2106 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|. | |
2107 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2108 | |
743 | 2109 |
2110 *'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'* | |
2111 'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' boolean (default off) | |
2112 local to window | |
2113 {not in Vi} | |
2114 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
2115 feature} | |
2116 Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn | |
2117 |hl-CursorColumn|. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing | |
2118 slower. | |
826 | 2119 If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use |
2120 these autocommands: > | |
2121 au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn | |
2122 au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn | |
2123 < | |
743 | 2124 |
2125 *'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'* | |
2126 'cursorline' 'cul' boolean (default off) | |
2127 local to window | |
2128 {not in Vi} | |
2129 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
2130 feature} | |
2131 Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine | |
2132 |hl-CursorLine|. Useful to easily spot the cursor. Will make screen | |
2133 redrawing slower. | |
818 | 2134 When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it |
825 | 2135 easier to see the selected text. |
743 | 2136 |
2137 | |
7 | 2138 *'debug'* |
2139 'debug' string (default "") | |
2140 global | |
2141 {not in Vi} | |
839 | 2142 These values can be used: |
2143 msg Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2144 anyway. | |
2145 throw Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2146 anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|. | |
2147 beep A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be | |
2148 produced. | |
168 | 2149 The values can be combined, separated by a comma. |
839 | 2150 "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or |
2151 'indentexpr'. | |
7 | 2152 |
2153 *'define'* *'def'* | |
2154 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define") | |
2155 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2156 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 2157 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search |
7 | 2158 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the |
2159 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is | |
2160 used to recognize the defined name after the match: | |
2161 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char} | |
2162 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space | |
2163 or backslash. | |
2164 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be | |
2165 useful, to include const type declarations: > | |
2166 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\) | |
2167 < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes! | |
2168 | |
2169 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'* | |
2170 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off) | |
2171 global | |
2172 {not in Vi} | |
2173 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2174 feature} | |
2175 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode | |
2176 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the | |
2177 default) the character along with its combining characters are | |
2178 deleted. | |
2179 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"! | |
2180 | |
2181 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one | |
2182 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want | |
2183 to remove only the combining ones. | |
2184 | |
2185 *'dictionary'* *'dict'* | |
2186 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "") | |
2187 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2188 {not in Vi} | |
2189 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
2190 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should | |
2191 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several | |
2192 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is | |
2193 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes. | |
703 | 2194 When this option is empty, or an entry "spell" is present, spell |
2195 checking is enabled the currently active spelling is used. |spell| | |
10 | 2196 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 2197 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
2198 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
99 | 2199 This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type. |
7 | 2200 Where to find a list of words? |
2201 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words". | |
2202 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory. | |
2203 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection. | |
2204 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2205 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2206 uses another default. | |
2207 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
2208 | |
2209 *'diff'* *'nodiff'* | |
2210 'diff' boolean (default off) | |
2211 local to window | |
2212 {not in Vi} | |
2213 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2214 feature} | |
2215 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences | |
10 | 2216 between files. See |vimdiff|. |
7 | 2217 |
2218 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'* | |
2219 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "") | |
2220 global | |
2221 {not in Vi} | |
2222 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2223 feature} | |
2224 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two | |
2225 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|. | |
2226 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2227 security reasons. | |
2228 | |
2229 *'dip'* *'diffopt'* | |
2230 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler") | |
2231 global | |
2232 {not in Vi} | |
2233 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2234 feature} | |
10 | 2235 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items. |
7 | 2236 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma. |
2237 | |
2238 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text | |
2239 synchronized with a window that has inserted | |
2240 lines at the same position. Mostly useful | |
2241 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind' | |
2242 is set. | |
2243 | |
2244 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change | |
2245 and a fold that contains unchanged lines. | |
2246 When omitted a context of six lines is used. | |
2247 See |fold-diff|. | |
2248 | |
2249 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A" | |
2250 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag | |
2251 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty. | |
2252 | |
2253 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds | |
2254 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2255 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2256 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2257 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing | |
2258 white space, but not leading white space. | |
2259 | |
766 | 2260 horizontal Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless |
2261 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2262 | |
2263 vertical Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless | |
2264 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2265 | |
2266 foldcolumn:{n} Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when | |
2267 starting diff mode. Without this 2 is used. | |
2268 | |
7 | 2269 Examples: > |
2270 | |
2271 :set diffopt=filler,context:4 | |
2272 :set diffopt= | |
766 | 2273 :set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3 |
7 | 2274 < |
2275 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'* | |
2276 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off) | |
2277 global | |
2278 {not in Vi} | |
2279 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs| | |
2280 feature} | |
2281 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS> | |
2282 {char2}. See |digraphs|. | |
2283 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2284 | |
2285 *'directory'* *'dir'* | |
2286 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
2287 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp" | |
2288 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp") | |
2289 global | |
2290 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas. | |
2291 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is | |
2292 possible. | |
2293 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is | |
2294 impossible!). | |
2295 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as | |
2296 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so | |
2297 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden" | |
2298 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible. | |
33 | 2299 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 2300 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading |
2301 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
459 | 2302 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//" |
2303 or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to | |
2304 the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. | |
2305 This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory. | |
1698 | 2306 On Win32, when a separating comma is following, you must use "//", |
2307 since "\\" will include the comma in the file name. | |
7 | 2308 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part |
2309 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
2310 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
2311 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
2312 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'. | |
2313 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2314 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
2315 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
2316 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
2317 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
2318 of the option is removed. | |
2319 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing | |
2320 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is | |
2321 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file. | |
2322 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better | |
2323 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap | |
2324 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your | |
2325 home directory is tried first. | |
2326 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2327 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2328 uses another default. | |
2329 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2330 security reasons. | |
2331 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"} | |
2332 | |
2333 *'display'* *'dy'* | |
2334 'display' 'dy' string (default "") | |
2335 global | |
2336 {not in Vi} | |
2337 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of | |
2338 flags: | |
2339 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line | |
10 | 2340 in a window will be displayed. When not included, a |
7 | 2341 last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines. |
2342 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx> | |
2343 instead of using ^C and ~C. | |
2344 | |
2345 *'eadirection'* *'ead'* | |
2346 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both") | |
2347 global | |
2348 {not in Vi} | |
2349 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit | |
2350 feature} | |
2351 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies: | |
2352 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected | |
2353 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected | |
2354 both width and height of windows is affected | |
2355 | |
2356 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'* | |
2357 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off) | |
2358 global | |
2359 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be | |
2360 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See | |
2361 also 'gdefault' option. | |
2362 Switching this option on is discouraged! | |
2363 | |
2364 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543* | |
2365 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG) | |
2366 global | |
2367 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2368 feature} | |
2369 {not in Vi} | |
2370 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in | |
2371 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the | |
2372 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work | |
2373 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values. | |
2374 | |
2375 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the | |
39 | 2376 existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid. |
7 | 2377 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim |
1152 | 2378 starts up. See |multibyte|. To reload the menus see |:menutrans|. |
7 | 2379 |
2380 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to | |
2381 "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of | |
2382 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and | |
2383 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made | |
10 | 2384 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal |
7 | 2385 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files |
2386 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty). | |
2387 | |
2388 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'. | |
10 | 2389 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with |
7 | 2390 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'. |
2391 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2392 If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2393 can use: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2394 if has("multi_byte_encoding") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2395 < |
7 | 2396 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will |
2397 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If | |
2398 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be | |
2399 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|. | |
2400 | |
2401 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand | |
2402 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary. | |
2403 | |
2404 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
2405 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated | |
2406 to '-' signs. | |
2407 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name. | |
2408 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes | |
2409 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8". | |
2410 | |
2411 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected. | |
2412 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the | |
2413 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and | |
2414 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using | |
2415 utf-8. | |
2416 | |
2417 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8. | |
2418 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the | |
2419 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus | |
2420 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has | |
2421 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty. | |
448 | 2422 |
2423 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was | |
2424 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed. | |
7 | 2425 |
2426 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'* | |
2427 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on) | |
2428 local to buffer | |
2429 {not in Vi} | |
2430 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option | |
10 | 2431 is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This |
7 | 2432 option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless |
2433 the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in | |
2434 which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this | |
2435 option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the | |
2436 file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a | |
2437 <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file | |
2438 the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change | |
2439 it if you want to. | |
2440 | |
2441 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'* | |
2442 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on) | |
2443 global | |
2444 {not in Vi} | |
2445 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after | |
33 | 2446 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the |
2447 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the | |
2448 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When | |
2449 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it | |
2450 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright'). | |
7 | 2451 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size |
2452 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The | |
2453 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected. | |
1354 | 2454 Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting |
2455 'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2456 If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2457 currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2458 the future). |
7 | 2459 |
2460 *'equalprg'* *'ep'* | |
2461 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "") | |
2462 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2463 {not in Vi} | |
2464 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty | |
1621 | 2465 the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2466 or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2467 the "indent" program is used. |
10 | 2468 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
7 | 2469 about including spaces and backslashes. |
2470 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2471 security reasons. | |
2472 | |
2473 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'* | |
2474 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off) | |
2475 global | |
2476 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only | |
2477 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always | |
2478 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal | |
10 | 2479 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep, |
7 | 2480 screen flash or do nothing. |
2481 | |
2482 *'errorfile'* *'ef'* | |
2483 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err", | |
2484 others: "errors.err") | |
2485 global | |
2486 {not in Vi} | |
2487 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2488 feature} | |
2489 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|). | |
2490 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the | |
2491 following argument. See |-q|. | |
2492 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that. | |
2493 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2494 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
2495 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2496 security reasons. | |
2497 | |
2498 *'errorformat'* *'efm'* | |
2499 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long) | |
2500 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2501 {not in Vi} | |
2502 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2503 feature} | |
2504 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file | |
2505 (see |errorformat|). | |
2506 | |
2507 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'* | |
2508 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
2509 global | |
2510 {not in Vi} | |
2511 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert | |
2512 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be | |
2513 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of | |
2514 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of | |
2515 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to | |
2516 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that | |
2517 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys | |
2518 won't work by default. | |
2519 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2520 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
2521 | |
2522 *'eventignore'* *'ei'* | |
2523 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "") | |
2524 global | |
2525 {not in Vi} | |
2526 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd| | |
2527 feature} | |
2528 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored. | |
844 | 2529 When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand |
2530 events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed. | |
7 | 2531 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: > |
2532 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave | |
2533 < | |
2534 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'* | |
2535 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off) | |
2536 local to buffer | |
2537 {not in Vi} | |
2538 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a | |
10 | 2539 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and |
7 | 2540 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is |
2541 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|. | |
2542 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2543 | |
2544 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'* | |
2545 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off) | |
2546 global | |
2547 {not in Vi} | |
2548 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current | |
2549 directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider | |
2550 setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local | |
2551 .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care! | |
2552 also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|. | |
2553 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2554 security reasons. | |
2555 | |
2556 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213* | |
2557 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "") | |
2558 local to buffer | |
2559 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2560 feature} | |
2561 {not in Vi} | |
2562 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer. | |
2563 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2564 done when writing the file. For reading see below. |
7 | 2565 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be |
2566 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file). | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2567 Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2568 both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2569 because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8. |
7 | 2570 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2571 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2572 is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2573 results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2574 characters may be lost! |
7 | 2575 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be |
2576 specified that can be handled by the converter, see | |
2577 |mbyte-conversion|. | |
2578 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'. | |
2579 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting | |
1152 | 2580 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument. One exception: when |
2581 'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used. | |
692 | 2582 For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used. |
7 | 2583 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored. |
2584 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
2585 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are | |
2586 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for | |
2587 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example | |
2588 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2". | |
2589 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' | |
2590 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
2591 If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to | |
2592 avoid this. | |
2593 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. | |
2594 | |
2595 *'fe'* | |
2596 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the | |
10 | 2597 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The |
7 | 2598 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used. |
2599 | |
2600 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'* | |
39 | 2601 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", |
2602 "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when | |
2603 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value) | |
7 | 2604 global |
2605 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2606 feature} | |
2607 {not in Vi} | |
2608 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit | |
2609 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first | |
2610 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one | |
2611 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works, | |
10 | 2612 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to |
7 | 2613 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used. |
2614 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When | |
2615 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants) | |
2616 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse | |
2617 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not | |
596 | 2618 "utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost! You can use |
2619 the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters | |
2620 that can't be converted. | |
7 | 2621 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings |
2622 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except | |
2623 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer | |
2624 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your | |
2625 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: > | |
2626 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 | | |
2627 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif | |
2628 < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain | |
2629 non-blank characters. | |
596 | 2630 When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is |
2631 not used. | |
692 | 2632 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value |
2633 of 'fileencoding' is used instead. You can set it with: > | |
2634 :setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2 | |
2635 < This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than | |
2636 an empty file. | |
7 | 2637 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM |
2638 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded | |
2639 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly. | |
2640 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last, | |
2641 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always | |
2642 accepted. | |
39 | 2643 The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the |
2644 environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful | |
2645 when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a | |
2646 non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian. | |
777 | 2647 When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte |
2648 sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8. You can use the |8g8| | |
2649 command to find the illegal byte sequence. | |
7 | 2650 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG: |
2651 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used | |
2652 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8 | |
2653 file | |
2654 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used | |
2655 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified. | |
2656 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values. | |
2657 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file | |
2658 is read. | |
2659 | |
2660 *'fileformat'* *'ff'* | |
2661 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos", | |
2662 Unix default: "unix", | |
2663 Macintosh default: "mac") | |
2664 local to buffer | |
2665 {not in Vi} | |
2666 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for | |
2667 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file: | |
2668 dos <CR> <NL> | |
2669 unix <NL> | |
2670 mac <CR> | |
2671 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored. | |
2672 See |file-formats| and |file-read|. | |
2673 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'. | |
2674 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O | |
2675 works like it was set to "unix'. | |
2676 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and | |
2677 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off. | |
2678 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' | |
2679 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
2680 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. | |
2681 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos", | |
2682 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset. | |
2683 | |
2684 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'* | |
2685 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default: | |
2686 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix", | |
2687 Vim Unix: "unix,dos", | |
2688 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos", | |
2689 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos", | |
2690 Vi others: "") | |
2691 global | |
2692 {not in Vi} | |
2693 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when | |
2694 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing | |
2695 buffer: | |
2696 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used | |
2697 always. It is not set automatically. | |
2698 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer | |
10 | 2699 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The |
7 | 2700 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing |
2701 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to. | |
2702 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic | |
2703 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to | |
2704 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>: | |
2705 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos", | |
2706 'fileformat' is set to "dos". | |
2707 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat' | |
10 | 2708 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a |
7 | 2709 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos". |
2710 3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac". | |
2711 This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present, | |
2712 or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not | |
2713 present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file. | |
2714 Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before | |
2715 the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in | |
2716 the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac". | |
2717 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from | |
2718 'fileformats' is used. | |
2719 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but | |
2720 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that | |
2721 file only, the option is not changed. | |
2722 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used. | |
2723 | |
2724 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that | |
2725 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be | |
2726 done: | |
2727 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos | |
2728 format will be used. | |
2729 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection | |
2730 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a | |
2731 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is | |
2732 used. | |
2733 Also see |file-formats|. | |
2734 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty | |
2735 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset, | |
2736 otherwise 'textauto' is set. | |
2737 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2738 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
2739 | |
2740 *'filetype'* *'ft'* | |
2741 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "") | |
2742 local to buffer | |
2743 {not in Vi} | |
2744 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd| | |
2745 feature} | |
2746 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered. | |
2747 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be | |
2748 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file | |
2749 name. | |
2750 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type. | |
2751 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable | |
2752 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype| | |
2753 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline, | |
2754 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized. | |
782 | 2755 Example, for in an IDL file: |
2756 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~ | |
2757 |FileType| |filetypes| | |
2758 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
2759 names. Example: | |
2760 /* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
2761 This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype. | |
2762 This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files. More than | |
2763 one dot may appear. | |
7 | 2764 Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file |
2765 type that is actually stored with the file. | |
2766 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or | |
2767 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 2768 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 2769 |
2770 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'* | |
2771 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-") | |
2772 global | |
2773 {not in Vi} | |
2774 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| | |
2775 and |+folding| features} | |
2776 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators. | |
2777 It is a comma separated list of items: | |
2778 | |
2779 item default Used for ~ | |
2780 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window | |
2781 stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows | |
2782 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit| | |
2783 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext' | |
2784 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option | |
2785 | |
10 | 2786 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and |
7 | 2787 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-' |
2788 otherwise. | |
2789 | |
2790 Example: > | |
2791 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:- | |
2792 < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also | |
2793 be used when there is highlighting. | |
2794 | |
819 | 2795 for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported. |
2796 | |
7 | 2797 The highlighting used for these items: |
2798 item highlight group ~ | |
2799 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine| | |
2800 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC| | |
2801 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit| | |
2802 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded| | |
2803 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete| | |
2804 | |
2805 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'* | |
2806 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198* | |
2807 global | |
2808 {not in Vi} | |
2809 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
2810 feature} | |
2811 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set. | |
2812 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
10 | 2813 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 2814 |
2815 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'* | |
2816 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "") | |
2817 global | |
2818 {not in Vi} | |
2819 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2820 feature} | |
2821 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and | |
2822 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to | |
2823 automatically close when moving out of them. | |
2824 | |
2825 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'* | |
2826 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0) | |
2827 local to window | |
2828 {not in Vi} | |
2829 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2830 feature} | |
2831 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side | |
2832 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum | |
2833 value is 12. | |
2834 See |folding|. | |
2835 | |
2836 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'* | |
2837 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on) | |
2838 local to window | |
2839 {not in Vi} | |
2840 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2841 feature} | |
2842 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly | |
2843 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with | |
2844 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled | |
10 | 2845 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when |
7 | 2846 'foldenable' is off. |
2847 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold. | |
2848 See |folding|. | |
2849 | |
2850 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'* | |
2851 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0") | |
2852 local to window | |
2853 {not in Vi} | |
2854 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2855 or |+eval| feature} | |
2856 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated | |
634 | 2857 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. |
782 | 2858 |
634 | 2859 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
2860 |sandbox-option|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2861 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2862 on. |
634 | 2863 |
2864 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
2865 evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|. | |
7 | 2866 |
2867 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'* | |
2868 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#") | |
2869 local to window | |
2870 {not in Vi} | |
2871 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2872 feature} | |
2873 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with | |
2874 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding | |
10 | 2875 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character. |
7 | 2876 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|. |
2877 | |
2878 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'* | |
2879 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0) | |
2880 local to window | |
2881 {not in Vi} | |
2882 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2883 feature} | |
2884 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed. | |
2885 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will | |
2886 close fewer folds. | |
2887 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|. | |
2888 See |fold-foldlevel|. | |
2889 | |
2890 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'* | |
2891 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1) | |
2892 global | |
2893 {not in Vi} | |
2894 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2895 feature} | |
2896 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window. | |
2897 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero), | |
2898 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99). | |
2899 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline | |
10 | 2900 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also |
7 | 2901 ignores this option and closes all folds. |
2902 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to | |
2903 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files. | |
2904 When the value is negative, it is not used. | |
2905 | |
2906 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536* | |
2907 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}") | |
2908 local to window | |
2909 {not in Vi} | |
2910 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2911 feature} | |
2912 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There | |
2913 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The | |
2914 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow). | |
2915 See |fold-marker|. | |
2916 | |
2917 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'* | |
2918 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual") | |
2919 local to window | |
2920 {not in Vi} | |
2921 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2922 feature} | |
2923 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values: | |
2924 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually. | |
2925 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold. | |
2926 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line. | |
2927 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds. | |
2928 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds. | |
2929 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed. | |
2930 | |
2931 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'* | |
2932 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1) | |
2933 local to window | |
2934 {not in Vi} | |
2935 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2936 feature} | |
2937 Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed | |
2938 closed. Also for manually closed folds. | |
2939 Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed. After using | |
2940 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller | |
2941 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold. | |
2942 | |
2943 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'* | |
2944 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20) | |
2945 local to window | |
2946 {not in Vi} | |
2947 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2948 feature} | |
2949 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax" | |
2950 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more | |
2951 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20. | |
2952 | |
2953 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'* | |
2954 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix, | |
2955 search,tag,undo") | |
2956 global | |
2957 {not in Vi} | |
2958 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2959 feature} | |
2960 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the | |
2961 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated | |
2962 list of items. | |
2963 item commands ~ | |
2964 all any | |
2965 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc. | |
2966 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc. | |
2967 insert any command in Insert mode | |
2968 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc. | |
2969 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc. | |
2970 percent "%" | |
2971 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc. | |
2972 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc. | |
2973 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command) | |
819 | 2974 Also for |[s| and |]s|. |
7 | 2975 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc. |
2976 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R | |
10 | 2977 When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add |
7 | 2978 the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect. |
2979 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%") | |
2980 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the | |
2981 whole closed fold. | |
2982 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it | |
2983 very difficult to move onto a closed fold. | |
2984 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open | |
2985 when text is inserted. | |
2986 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or | |
2987 set the 'foldclose' option to "all". | |
2988 | |
2989 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'* | |
2990 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()") | |
2991 local to window | |
2992 {not in Vi} | |
2993 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2994 feature} | |
2995 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed | |
2996 fold. See |fold-foldtext|. | |
2997 | |
634 | 2998 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
2999 |sandbox-option|. | |
3000 | |
3001 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3002 evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|. | |
3003 | |
7 | 3004 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'* |
3005 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt") | |
3006 local to buffer | |
3007 {not in Vi} | |
3008 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic | |
3009 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is | |
3010 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can | |
3011 be inserted for readability. | |
3012 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3013 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3014 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3015 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3016 | |
41 | 3017 *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'* |
3018 'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*") | |
3019 local to buffer | |
3020 {not in Vi} | |
3021 A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for | |
3022 the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'. | |
3023 The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for | |
140 | 3024 the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match |
41 | 3025 while still checking more characters. There must be a character |
3026 following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled | |
3027 like there is no match. | |
3028 The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation | |
3029 character and white space. | |
3030 | |
7 | 3031 *'formatprg'* *'fp'* |
3032 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "") | |
3033 global | |
3034 {not in Vi} | |
3035 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines | |
667 | 3036 selected with the |gq| operator. The program must take the input on |
7 | 3037 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is |
557 | 3038 such a program. |
667 | 3039 If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead. |
3040 Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal | |
3041 format function will be used |C-indenting|. | |
557 | 3042 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
3043 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
667 | 3044 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
3045 |sandbox-option|. | |
3046 | |
3047 *'formatexpr'* *'fex'* | |
3048 'formatexpr' 'fex' string (default "") | |
3049 local to buffer | |
3050 {not in Vi} | |
3051 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| | |
3052 feature} | |
3053 Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq| | |
844 | 3054 operator. When this option is empty 'formatprg' is used. |
3055 | |
3056 The |v:lnum| variable holds the first line to be formatted. | |
856 | 3057 The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted. |
3058 The |v:char| variable holds the character that is going to be | |
3059 inserted. This can be empty. Don't insert it yet! | |
844 | 3060 |
667 | 3061 Example: > |
681 | 3062 :set formatexpr=mylang#Format() |
667 | 3063 < This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the |
3064 autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload| | |
3065 | |
3066 The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding | |
3067 text beyond that limit. This happens under the same conditions as | |
3068 when internal formatting is used. Make sure the cursor is kept in the | |
3069 same spot relative to the text then! The |mode()| function will | |
3070 return "i" or "R" in this situation. When the function returns | |
3071 non-zero Vim will fall back to using the internal format mechanism. | |
3072 | |
3073 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see | |
3074 |sandbox-option|. | |
3075 | |
3076 *'fsync'* *'fs'* | |
36 | 3077 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on) |
3078 global | |
3079 {not in Vi} | |
3080 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a | |
3081 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely | |
3082 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This | |
3083 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop | |
3084 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that | |
3085 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On | |
3086 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always | |
3087 off. | |
3088 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files. | |
3089 | |
7 | 3090 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'* |
3091 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off) | |
3092 global | |
3093 {not in Vi} | |
3094 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that | |
3095 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag | |
3096 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution | |
3097 of all or one match. See |complex-change|. | |
3098 | |
3099 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~ | |
3100 :s/// subst. all subst. one | |
3101 :s///g subst. one subst. all | |
3102 :s///gg subst. all subst. one | |
3103 | |
3104 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
3105 | |
3106 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'* | |
3107 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m") | |
3108 global | |
3109 {not in Vi} | |
3110 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output. | |
3111 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the | |
3112 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|. | |
3113 | |
3114 *'grepprg'* *'gp'* | |
3115 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ", | |
3116 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null", | |
3117 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n", | |
3118 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ") | |
3119 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
3120 {not in Vi} | |
233 | 3121 Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%' |
7 | 3122 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command- |
3123 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments | |
3124 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See | |
3125 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
3126 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep" | |
3127 also work well with a single file: > | |
3128 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH | |
161 | 3129 < Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command |
657 | 3130 works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like |
3131 |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|. | |
41 | 3132 See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there |
7 | 3133 apply equally to 'grepprg'. |
3134 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found, | |
3135 otherwise it's "grep -n". | |
3136 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
3137 security reasons. | |
3138 | |
3139 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549* | |
3140 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3141 ve:ver35-Cursor, | |
3142 o:hor50-Cursor, | |
3143 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3144 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3145 sm:block-Cursor | |
3146 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175", | |
3147 for MS-DOS and Win32 console: | |
3148 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15, | |
3149 r-cr:hor30,sm:block") | |
3150 global | |
3151 {not in Vi} | |
3152 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and | |
3153 for MS-DOS and Win32 console} | |
3154 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different | |
10 | 3155 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only |
7 | 3156 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by |
3157 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or | |
3158 horizontal cursor. | |
36 | 3159 For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used. |
7 | 3160 |
10 | 3161 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a |
7 | 3162 mode-list and an argument-list: |
3163 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,.. | |
3164 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes: | |
3165 n Normal mode | |
3166 v Visual mode | |
3167 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
3168 if not specified) | |
3169 o Operator-pending mode | |
3170 i Insert mode | |
3171 r Replace mode | |
3172 c Command-line Normal (append) mode | |
3173 ci Command-line Insert mode | |
3174 cr Command-line Replace mode | |
3175 sm showmatch in Insert mode | |
3176 a all modes | |
3177 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments: | |
3178 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height | |
3179 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width | |
3180 block block cursor, fills the whole character | |
3181 [only one of the above three should be present] | |
3182 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking* | |
3183 blinkon{N} | |
3184 blinkoff{N} | |
3185 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before | |
3186 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that | |
3187 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the | |
3188 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one | |
3189 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The | |
3190 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250". | |
3191 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This | |
3192 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch | |
3193 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only | |
3194 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while | |
3195 executing a command. | |
3196 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see | |
3197 |xterm-blink|. | |
3198 {group-name} | |
3199 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font | |
3200 for the cursor | |
3201 {group-name}/{group-name} | |
3202 Two highlight group names, the first is used when | |
3203 no language mappings are used, the other when they | |
3204 are. |language-mapping| | |
3205 | |
3206 Examples of parts: | |
3207 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a | |
3208 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor" | |
3209 highlight group | |
3210 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150 | |
3211 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a | |
3212 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the | |
3213 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit | |
3214 faster. | |
3215 | |
3216 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for | |
3217 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used | |
3218 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off | |
3219 blinking: "a:blinkon0" | |
3220 | |
3221 Examples of cursor highlighting: > | |
3222 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE | |
3223 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg | |
3224 < | |
3225 *'guifont'* *'gfn'* | |
3226 *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611* | |
3227 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "") | |
3228 global | |
3229 {not in Vi} | |
3230 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3231 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim. | |
3232 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When | |
3233 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other | |
3234 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas. | |
3235 The first valid font is used. | |
8 | 3236 |
170 | 3237 On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is |
3238 not empty, then 'guifont' is not used. | |
8 | 3239 |
7 | 3240 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name |
3241 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra | |
3242 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also | |
3243 |option-backslash|. For example: > | |
3244 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas | |
8 | 3245 < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it |
7 | 3246 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead. |
8 | 3247 |
3248 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting. | |
3249 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource | |
3250 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it | |
3251 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in | |
3252 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim | |
3253 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts. | |
3254 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3255 For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: > |
8 | 3256 :set guifont=* |
3257 < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want. | |
3258 | |
3259 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a | |
3260 way to set 'guifont' for various systems. | |
3261 | |
7 | 3262 For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: > |
3263 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3264 < That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3265 well: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3266 if has("gui_gtk2") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3267 set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3268 set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3269 endif |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3270 < |
170 | 3271 For Mac OSX you can use something like this: > |
3272 :set guifont=Monaco:h10 | |
853 | 3273 < Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems. |
3274 *E236* | |
7 | 3275 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same |
8 | 3276 width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but |
3277 mono-spaced fonts look best. | |
3278 | |
7 | 3279 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel" |
3280 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts. | |
8 | 3281 |
7 | 3282 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245* |
3283 - takes these options in the font name: | |
3284 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3285 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3286 b - bold | |
3287 i - italic | |
3288 u - underline | |
3289 s - strikeout | |
233 | 3290 cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC, |
7 | 3291 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK, |
3292 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS, | |
3293 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC. | |
22 | 3294 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT". |
7 | 3295 |
3296 Use a ':' to separate the options. | |
3297 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use | |
3298 backslashes to escape the spaces. | |
3299 - Examples: > | |
3300 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN | |
3301 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5 | |
3302 < See also |font-sizes|. | |
3303 | |
3304 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'* | |
3305 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598* | |
3306 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "") | |
3307 global | |
3308 {not in Vi} | |
3309 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
3310 with the |+xfontset| feature} | |
3311 {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI} | |
3312 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first | |
3313 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See | |
3314 |xfontset|. | |
3315 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as | |
3316 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the | |
3317 |:highlight| command. | |
3318 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the | |
3319 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting | |
3320 'guifontset' will fail. | |
3321 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont' | |
3322 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be | |
3323 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name, | |
3324 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative | |
3325 fontset names. | |
3326 This example works on many X11 systems: > | |
3327 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-* | |
3328 < | |
3329 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534* | |
3330 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "") | |
3331 global | |
3332 {not in Vi} | |
3333 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3334 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used | |
3335 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is | |
3336 used. | |
3337 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one | |
3338 specified with 'guifont' and the same height. | |
3339 | |
3340 All GUI versions but GTK+ 2: | |
3341 | |
3342 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and | |
3343 'guifontset' is empty or invalid. | |
3344 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and | |
3345 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching | |
3346 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it. | |
3347 | |
3348 GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2* | |
3349 | |
3350 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width | |
3351 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8". | |
3352 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide' | |
10 | 3353 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the |
7 | 3354 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need |
3355 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice | |
3356 made by Pango/Xft. | |
3357 | |
3358 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'* | |
3359 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50) | |
3360 global | |
3361 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI} | |
3362 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting | |
3363 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started, | |
3364 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will | |
10 | 3365 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel |
7 | 3366 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the |
3367 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the | |
3368 screen. | |
3369 | |
3370 *'guioptions'* *'go'* | |
3371 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows), | |
233 | 3372 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)) |
7 | 3373 global |
3374 {not in Vi} | |
3375 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
8 | 3376 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a |
7 | 3377 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the |
3378 GUI should be used. | |
3379 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3380 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3381 | |
3382 Valid letters are as follows: | |
1152 | 3383 *guioptions_a* *'go-a'* |
7 | 3384 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started, |
3385 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of | |
3386 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the | |
3387 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other | |
3388 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode | |
3389 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an | |
3390 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text | |
3391 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register. | |
3392 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other | |
3393 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended. | |
3394 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the | |
3395 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to | |
3396 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register. | |
3397 The same applies to the modeless selection. | |
1152 | 3398 *'go-A'* |
10 | 3399 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only |
7 | 3400 applies to the modeless selection. |
3401 | |
3402 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~ | |
3403 "" - - | |
3404 "a" yes yes | |
3405 "A" - yes | |
3406 "aA" yes yes | |
3407 | |
1152 | 3408 *'go-c'* |
7 | 3409 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple |
3410 choices. | |
1152 | 3411 *'go-e'* |
697 | 3412 'e' Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'. |
688 | 3413 'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels. |
3414 When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used. | |
857 | 3415 The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently |
1621 | 3416 GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows. |
1152 | 3417 *'go-f'* |
7 | 3418 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell |
3419 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the | |
3420 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you | |
3421 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the | |
3422 foreground. |gui-fork| | |
3423 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have | |
819 | 3424 happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read. |
1152 | 3425 *'go-i'* |
7 | 3426 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper |
3427 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of | |
3428 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|. | |
1152 | 3429 *'go-m'* |
7 | 3430 'm' Menu bar is present. |
1152 | 3431 *'go-M'* |
10 | 3432 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note |
7 | 3433 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before |
819 | 3434 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc| |
7 | 3435 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the |
3436 ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too). | |
1152 | 3437 *'go-g'* |
7 | 3438 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If |
3439 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all. | |
3440 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items. | |
1152 | 3441 *'go-t'* |
7 | 3442 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32, |
3443 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI. | |
1152 | 3444 *'go-T'* |
236 | 3445 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon |
856 | 3446 and Athena GUIs. |
1152 | 3447 *'go-r'* |
7 | 3448 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present. |
1152 | 3449 *'go-R'* |
7 | 3450 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3451 split window. | |
1152 | 3452 *'go-l'* |
7 | 3453 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present. |
1152 | 3454 *'go-L'* |
7 | 3455 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3456 split window. | |
1152 | 3457 *'go-b'* |
7 | 3458 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on |
3459 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h' | |
3460 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
1152 | 3461 *'go-h'* |
7 | 3462 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor |
3463 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
3464 | |
3465 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if | |
3466 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information. | |
3467 | |
1152 | 3468 *'go-v'* |
7 | 3469 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included, |
3470 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a | |
3471 vertical layout is used anyway. | |
1152 | 3472 *'go-p'* |
7 | 3473 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some |
3474 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at | |
3475 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done | |
819 | 3476 before starting the GUI. Set it in your |gvimrc|. Adding or |
7 | 3477 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect. |
1152 | 3478 *'go-F'* |
10 | 3479 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|. |
7 | 3480 |
1152 | 3481 |
7 | 3482 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'* |
3483 'guipty' boolean (default on) | |
3484 global | |
3485 {not in Vi} | |
3486 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3487 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for | |
3488 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|. | |
3489 | |
688 | 3490 *'guitablabel'* *'gtl'* |
3491 'guitablabel' 'gtl' string (default empty) | |
3492 global | |
3493 {not in Vi} | |
692 | 3494 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and |
3495 with the +windows feature} | |
688 | 3496 When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab |
857 | 3497 pages line. When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a |
3498 default label. See |setting-guitablabel| for more info. | |
688 | 3499 |
692 | 3500 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
839 | 3501 'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below. |
692 | 3502 |
688 | 3503 Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed. 'e' must be |
3504 present in 'guioptions'. For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is | |
3505 used. | |
3506 | |
839 | 3507 *'guitabtooltip'* *'gtt'* |
3508 'guitabtooltip' 'gtt' string (default empty) | |
3509 global | |
3510 {not in Vi} | |
3511 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
3512 with the +windows feature} | |
3513 When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab | |
3514 pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip. | |
3515 This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3516 You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use |:let|: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3517 :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two" |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3518 < |
839 | 3519 |
7 | 3520 *'helpfile'* *'hf'* |
3521 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt" | |
3522 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt") | |
3523 global | |
3524 {not in Vi} | |
3525 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be | |
3526 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories | |
3527 in 'runtimepath' will be used. | |
3528 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example: | |
3529 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also | |
10 | 3530 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including |
7 | 3531 spaces and backslashes. |
3532 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
3533 security reasons. | |
3534 | |
3535 *'helpheight'* *'hh'* | |
3536 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20) | |
3537 global | |
3538 {not in Vi} | |
3539 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
3540 feature} | |
3541 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the | |
3542 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the | |
3543 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other | |
3544 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is | |
3545 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable. | |
3546 | |
3547 *'helplang'* *'hlg'* | |
3548 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty) | |
3549 global | |
3550 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| | |
3551 feature} | |
3552 {not in Vi} | |
3553 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language | |
3554 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always | |
3555 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over | |
3556 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that | |
3557 language and not in the English help. | |
3558 Example: > | |
3559 :set helplang=de,it | |
3560 < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help | |
3561 files. | |
3562 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will | |
3563 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option. | |
3564 See |help-translated|. | |
3565 | |
3566 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'* | |
3567 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off) | |
3568 global | |
3569 {not in Vi} | |
3570 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a | |
3571 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still | |
3572 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course. | |
3573 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer | |
3574 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is | |
3575 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!' | |
10 | 3576 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|. |
12 | 3577 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option. |
7 | 3578 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|. |
3579 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers. | |
3580 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!". | |
3581 | |
3582 *'highlight'* *'hl'* | |
3583 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string): | |
3584 "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory, | |
3585 e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg, | |
3586 M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question, | |
819 | 3587 s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit, |
7 | 3588 t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu, |
3589 f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd, | |
3590 C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText, | |
386 | 3591 >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap, |
540 | 3592 R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal, |
3593 +:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel, | |
3594 x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb") | |
7 | 3595 global |
3596 {not in Vi} | |
3597 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various | |
3598 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The | |
3599 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to | |
10 | 3600 use for that occasion. The occasions are: |
7 | 3601 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map" |
3602 |hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and | |
3603 characters from 'showbreak' | |
3604 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special | |
3605 things in listings | |
3606 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages | |
3607 h (obsolete, ignored) | |
3608 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting | |
3609 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch') | |
3610 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt| | |
3611 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --") | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3612 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3613 when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set. |
7 | 3614 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
3615 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line| | |
3616 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows | |
3617 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. | |
3618 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows | |
3619 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode | |
3620 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the | |
3621 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and | |
3622 |xterm-clipboard|. | |
3623 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages | |
3624 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu' | |
3625 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds | |
3626 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn' | |
386 | 3627 |hl-DiffAdd| A added line in diff mode |
3628 |hl-DiffChange| C changed line in diff mode | |
3629 |hl-DiffDelete| D deleted line in diff mode | |
3630 |hl-DiffText| T inserted text in diff mode | |
7 | 3631 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs| |
221 | 3632 |hl-SpellBad| B misspelled word |spell| |
386 | 3633 |hl-SpellCap| P word that should start with capital|spell| |
221 | 3634 |hl-SpellRare| R rare word |spell| |
3635 |hl-SpellLocal| L word from other region |spell| | |
540 | 3636 |hl-Pmenu| + popup menu normal line |
3637 |hl-PmenuSel| = popup menu normal line | |
3638 |hl-PmenuSbar| x popup menu scrollbar | |
3639 |hl-PmenuThumb| X popup menu scrollbar thumb | |
7 | 3640 |
3641 The display modes are: | |
3642 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me") | |
3643 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR") | |
3644 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me") | |
3645 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se") | |
3646 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue") | |
205 | 3647 c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce") |
7 | 3648 n no highlighting |
3649 - no highlighting | |
3650 : use a highlight group | |
3651 The default is used for occasions that are not included. | |
3652 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors| | |
3653 for an example. | |
3654 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of | |
3655 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type | |
3656 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to | |
3657 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion. | |
3658 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups. | |
3659 | |
3660 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'* | |
3661 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off) | |
3662 global | |
3663 {not in Vi} | |
3664 {not available when compiled without the | |
3665 |+extra_search| feature} | |
3666 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches. | |
3667 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the | |
3668 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by | |
3669 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets | |
3670 are not applied. | |
3671 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|. | |
3672 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it | |
3673 off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the | |
3674 highlighting comes back. | |
1621 | 3675 'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches. |
7 | 3676 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to |
3677 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the | |
10 | 3678 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first |
7 | 3679 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not |
819 | 3680 drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line. |
7 | 3681 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
3682 | |
3683 *'history'* *'hi'* | |
3684 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0) | |
3685 global | |
3686 {not in Vi} | |
3687 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns | |
3688 are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in | |
3689 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|). | |
3690 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3691 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3692 | |
3693 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'* | |
3694 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off) | |
3695 global | |
3696 {not in Vi} | |
3697 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
3698 feature} | |
3699 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set. | |
3700 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
3701 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|. | |
3702 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
3703 | |
3704 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'* | |
3705 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off) | |
3706 global | |
3707 {not in Vi} | |
3708 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
3709 feature} | |
3710 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on. | |
3711 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard. | |
3712 See |rileft.txt|. | |
3713 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
3714 | |
3715 *'icon'* *'noicon'* | |
3716 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
3717 global | |
3718 {not in Vi} | |
3719 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
3720 feature} | |
3721 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of | |
3722 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file | |
3723 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used. | |
3724 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option. | |
3725 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently | |
3726 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are | |
3727 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the | |
3728 builtin termcap). | |
3729 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
233 | 3730 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on |
7 | 3731 X11. |
3732 | |
3733 *'iconstring'* | |
3734 'iconstring' string (default "") | |
3735 global | |
3736 {not in Vi} | |
3737 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
3738 feature} | |
3739 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of | |
3740 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on. | |
3741 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text | |
3742 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option). | |
3743 Does not work for MS Windows. | |
3744 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
3745 restored if possible |X11|. | |
3746 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be | |
10 | 3747 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See |
7 | 3748 'titlestring' for example settings. |
3749 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
3750 | |
3751 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'* | |
3752 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off) | |
3753 global | |
3754 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags | |
3755 file. | |
3756 Also see 'smartcase'. | |
3757 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see | |
3758 |/ignorecase|. | |
3759 | |
3760 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'* | |
3761 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "") | |
3762 global | |
3763 {not in Vi} | |
3764 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and | |
3765 |+GUI_GTK|} | |
3766 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for | |
3767 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control | |
3768 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'. | |
3769 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option | |
3770 tells Vim what the key is. | |
3771 Format: | |
3772 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING | |
3773 | |
3774 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored): | |
3775 S Shift key | |
3776 L Lock key | |
3777 C Control key | |
3778 1 Mod1 key | |
3779 2 Mod2 key | |
3780 3 Mod3 key | |
3781 4 Mod4 key | |
3782 5 Mod5 key | |
3783 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are | |
3784 both shift+ctrl+space. | |
3785 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING. | |
3786 | |
3787 Example: > | |
3788 :set imactivatekey=S-space | |
3789 < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 + | |
3790 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean). | |
3791 | |
3792 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'* | |
3793 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off) | |
3794 global | |
3795 {not in Vi} | |
3796 {only available when compiled with the |+xim| | |
3797 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature} | |
3798 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command | |
3799 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that). | |
3800 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering | |
3801 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented | |
3802 characters with dead keys. | |
3803 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3804 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'* |
7 | 3805 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI)) |
3806 global | |
3807 {not in Vi} | |
3808 {only available when compiled with the |+xim| | |
3809 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature} | |
3810 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable | |
3811 the IM when it doesn't work properly. | |
3812 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This | |
3813 may change in later releases. | |
3814 | |
3815 *'iminsert'* *'imi'* | |
3816 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported) | |
3817 local to buffer | |
3818 {not in Vi} | |
3819 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in | |
3820 Insert mode. Valid values: | |
3821 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
3822 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
3823 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
3824 2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim| | |
3825 or |global-ime|. | |
3826 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc> | |
3827 this can be used: > | |
3828 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR> | |
3829 < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert | |
3830 mode. | |
3831 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode | |
3832 |i_CTRL-^|. | |
3833 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name. | |
3834 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f". | |
3835 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
3836 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
3837 | |
3838 *'imsearch'* *'ims'* | |
3839 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported) | |
3840 local to buffer | |
3841 {not in Vi} | |
3842 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when | |
3843 entering a search pattern. Valid values: | |
3844 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like | |
3845 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern | |
3846 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
3847 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
3848 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
3849 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode | |
3850 |c_CTRL-^|. | |
3851 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap' | |
3852 option to a valid keymap name. | |
3853 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
3854 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
3855 | |
3856 *'include'* *'inc'* | |
3857 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include") | |
3858 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
3859 {not in Vi} | |
3860 {not available when compiled without the | |
3861 |+find_in_path| feature} | |
10 | 3862 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search |
7 | 3863 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default |
3864 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i", | |
532 | 3865 "]I", "[d", etc. |
3866 Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that | |
534 | 3867 comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern |
3868 then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it | |
3869 appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters | |
3870 that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use | |
3871 'includeexpr' to process the matched text. | |
532 | 3872 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
7 | 3873 |
3874 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'* | |
3875 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "") | |
3876 local to buffer | |
3877 {not in Vi} | |
3878 {not available when compiled without the | |
3879 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature} | |
3880 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include' | |
10 | 3881 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: > |
7 | 3882 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g') |
3883 < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected. | |
634 | 3884 |
7 | 3885 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be |
10 | 3886 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement. |
7 | 3887 Also used for |<cfile>|. |
3888 | |
634 | 3889 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
3890 |sandbox-option|. | |
3891 | |
3892 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3893 evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|. | |
3894 | |
7 | 3895 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'* |
3896 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off) | |
3897 global | |
3898 {not in Vi} | |
3899 {not available when compiled without the | |
3900 |+extra_search| feature} | |
17 | 3901 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed |
3902 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern | |
3903 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated | |
3904 often, this is only useful on fast terminals. | |
3905 Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its | |
3906 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You | |
3907 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the | |
3908 cursor to the match. | |
1521 | 3909 When compiled with the |+reltime| feature Vim only searches for about |
3910 half a second. With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the | |
3911 match may not be found. This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you | |
3912 are typing the pattern. | |
17 | 3913 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'. |
3914 See also: 'hlsearch'. | |
772 | 3915 CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match |
3916 to the command line. | |
3917 CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current | |
3918 match, excluding the characters that were already typed. | |
7 | 3919 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
3920 | |
3921 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'* | |
3922 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "") | |
3923 local to buffer | |
3924 {not in Vi} | |
3925 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
3926 or |+eval| features} | |
3927 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line. | |
3928 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and | |
3929 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option. | |
3930 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and | |
3931 'smartindent' indenting. | |
3932 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting. | |
3933 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for | |
534 | 3934 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line |
7 | 3935 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around). |
3936 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It | |
3937 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is | |
3938 used for the indent). | |
3939 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()| | |
3940 and |lispindent()|. | |
3941 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must | |
3942 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the | |
3943 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved. | |
3944 Normally this option would be set to call a function: > | |
3945 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent() | |
3946 < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains | |
3947 "msg". | |
634 | 3948 See |indent-expression|. |
7 | 3949 NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set. |
3950 | |
634 | 3951 The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see |
3952 |sandbox-option|. | |
3953 | |
3954 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3955 evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|. | |
3956 | |
3957 | |
7 | 3958 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'* |
3959 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
3960 local to buffer | |
3961 {not in Vi} | |
3962 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
3963 feature} | |
3964 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
3965 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty. | |
3966 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|. | |
3967 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|. | |
3968 | |
3969 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'* | |
3970 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off) | |
3971 local to buffer | |
3972 {not in Vi} | |
3973 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and | |
1621 | 3974 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending |
3975 on the typed text. If the typed text contains a lowercase letter | |
3976 where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made | |
3977 lowercase. If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match | |
3978 has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter, | |
3979 and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase. | |
3980 With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is. | |
7 | 3981 |
3982 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'* | |
3983 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off) | |
3984 global | |
3985 {not in Vi} | |
3986 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful | |
3987 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|. | |
3988 These Insert mode commands will be useful: | |
3989 - Use the cursor keys to move around. | |
3990 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When | |
3991 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off. | |
3992 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished. | |
3993 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use | |
477 | 3994 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor |
3995 left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. |i_CTRL-L| | |
7 | 3996 |
3997 These items change when 'insertmode' is set: | |
3998 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode. | |
3999 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps. | |
4000 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode. | |
4001 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted. | |
4002 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z* | |
4003 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like | |
4004 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same | |
4005 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set. | |
4006 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used. | |
4007 | |
4008 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4009 | |
4010 *'isfname'* *'isf'* | |
4011 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4012 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,=" | |
4013 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:" | |
4014 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~" | |
4015 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=" | |
4016 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=") | |
4017 global | |
4018 {not in Vi} | |
4019 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and | |
4020 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in | |
10 | 4021 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|. |
7 | 4022 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the |
4023 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. | |
4024 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well. | |
1621 | 4025 Think twice before adding white space to this option. Although a |
4026 space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim | |
4027 doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion. | |
4028 It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'. | |
7 | 4029 |
4030 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to | |
4031 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit | |
4032 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special | |
4033 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file | |
4034 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The | |
4035 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for | |
4036 cmd.exe. | |
4037 | |
4038 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas. | |
10 | 4039 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two |
4040 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a | |
7 | 4041 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does |
4042 not work for digits). Example: | |
4043 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range | |
4044 128 to 140 and '#' to 43) | |
4045 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range | |
4046 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left | |
4047 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is | |
4048 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the | |
4049 option or the end of a range. Example: | |
4050 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^') | |
4051 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE | |
4052 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z, | |
4053 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples: | |
4054 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower | |
1621 | 4055 case ASCII letters. |
7 | 4056 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character. |
4057 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is | |
4058 expected. Example: | |
4059 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore. | |
4060 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example: | |
4061 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding | |
4062 comma, plus <Tab>. | |
4063 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4064 | |
4065 *'isident'* *'isi'* | |
4066 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4067 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4068 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255") | |
4069 global | |
4070 {not in Vi} | |
4071 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers. | |
4072 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a | |
4073 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a | |
233 | 4074 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this |
7 | 4075 option. |
4076 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding | |
10 | 4077 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to |
7 | 4078 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead. |
4079 | |
4080 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'* | |
4081 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32: | |
4082 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4083 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255" | |
4084 Vi default: "@,48-57,_") | |
4085 local to buffer | |
4086 {not in Vi} | |
4087 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands: | |
10 | 4088 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See |
7 | 4089 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C |
4090 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>". | |
4091 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except | |
4092 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that | |
4093 command). | |
4094 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included. | |
4095 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
4096 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4097 | |
4098 *'isprint'* *'isp'* | |
4099 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh: | |
4100 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255") | |
4101 global | |
4102 {not in Vi} | |
4103 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the | |
4104 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from | |
4105 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly, | |
4106 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See | |
4107 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. | |
4108 | |
4109 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters: | |
4110 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_" | |
4111 32 - 126 always single characters | |
4112 127 "^?" | |
4113 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_" | |
4114 160 - 254 "| " - "|~" | |
4115 255 "~?" | |
4116 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are | |
4117 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte. | |
4118 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are | |
4119 displayed as <xx>. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4120 The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4121 |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 4122 |
4123 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the | |
4124 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character | |
4125 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a | |
4126 replacement character will be shown. | |
4127 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>. | |
4128 There is no option to specify these characters. | |
4129 | |
4130 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'* | |
4131 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on) | |
4132 global | |
4133 {not in Vi} | |
4134 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command. | |
4135 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'. | |
4136 Otherwise only one space is inserted. | |
4137 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
4138 | |
4139 *'key'* | |
4140 'key' string (default "") | |
4141 local to buffer | |
4142 {not in Vi} | |
4143 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer. | |
4144 See |encryption|. | |
4145 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed | |
4146 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: > | |
4147 :set key= | |
4148 < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or | |
4149 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't | |
4150 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it, | |
4151 be careful not to make a typing error! | |
4152 | |
4153 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544* | |
4154 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "") | |
4155 local to buffer | |
4156 {not in Vi} | |
4157 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap| | |
4158 feature} | |
4159 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|. | |
4160 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of | |
4161 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective. | |
4162 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1 | |
36 | 4163 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4164 |
4165 *'keymodel'* *'km'* | |
4166 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "") | |
4167 global | |
4168 {not in Vi} | |
4169 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys | |
4170 can do. These values can be used: | |
4171 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either | |
4172 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being | |
4173 present in 'selectmode'). | |
4174 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection. | |
4175 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>, | |
4176 <PageUp> and <PageDown>. | |
4177 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
4178 | |
4179 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'* | |
4180 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help", | |
4181 OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help") | |
4182 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4183 {not in Vi} | |
4184 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are | |
4185 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal | |
4186 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty | |
4187 value did this, which is now deprecated.) | |
4188 When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the | |
4189 "K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the | |
4190 "-s" is removed when there is no count. | |
4191 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4192 Example: > | |
4193 :set keywordprg=man\ -s | |
4194 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4195 security reasons. | |
4196 | |
4197 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358* | |
4198 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "") | |
4199 global | |
4200 {not in Vi} | |
4201 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| | |
4202 feature} | |
4203 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language | |
10 | 4204 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are |
7 | 4205 inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes |
4206 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning | |
4207 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to | |
4208 be able to execute Normal mode commands. | |
4209 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are | |
4210 mapped in Insert mode. | |
4211 | |
699 | 4212 Example (for Greek, in UTF-8): *greek* > |
4213 :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz | |
7 | 4214 < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): > |
4215 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ | |
4216 < | |
4217 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each | |
4218 part can be in one of two forms: | |
4219 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately | |
4220 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC". | |
4221 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to" | |
4222 characters. Example: "abc;ABC" | |
4223 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE" | |
4224 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are | |
4225 ";", ',' and backslash itself. | |
4226 | |
4227 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch | |
4228 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will | |
4229 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the | |
4230 langmap mappings) in the following cases: | |
4231 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings) | |
4232 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R | |
4233 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings | |
4234 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by | |
4235 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time | |
4236 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings. | |
4237 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time! | |
4238 | |
4239 *'langmenu'* *'lm'* | |
4240 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "") | |
4241 global | |
4242 {not in Vi} | |
4243 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and | |
4244 |+multi_lang| features} | |
4245 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded | |
4246 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': > | |
4247 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim" | |
4248 < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no | |
4249 matter what $LANG is set to: > | |
4250 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1 | |
4251 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used. | |
36 | 4252 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4253 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use |
4254 the English menus: > | |
4255 :set langmenu=none | |
4256 < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype | |
4257 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting | |
4258 this option has no effect. But you could do this: > | |
4259 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim | |
4260 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1 | |
4261 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim | |
4262 < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself! | |
4263 | |
4264 *'laststatus'* *'ls'* | |
4265 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1) | |
4266 global | |
4267 {not in Vi} | |
4268 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a | |
4269 status line: | |
4270 0: never | |
4271 1: only if there are at least two windows | |
4272 2: always | |
4273 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several | |
4274 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line| | |
4275 | |
4276 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'* | |
4277 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off) | |
4278 global | |
4279 {not in Vi} | |
4280 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while | |
4281 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been | |
10 | 4282 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an |
7 | 4283 update use |:redraw|. |
4284 | |
4285 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'* | |
4286 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off) | |
4287 local to window | |
4288 {not in Vi} | |
4289 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
4290 feature} | |
4291 If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather | |
4292 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike | |
4293 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file, | |
4294 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The | |
4295 value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. | |
4296 This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on. | |
4297 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed | |
4298 with the right amount of white space. | |
4299 | |
4300 *'lines'* *E593* | |
4301 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height) | |
4302 global | |
4303 Number of lines of the Vim window. | |
4304 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the | |
161 | 4305 terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|. |
7 | 4306 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
4307 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
4308 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
4309 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can | |
4310 use this command to get the tallest window possible: > | |
4311 :set lines=999 | |
571 | 4312 < Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000. |
4313 If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option. | |
7 | 4314 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical |
4315 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up. | |
4316 | |
4317 *'linespace'* *'lsp'* | |
4318 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI) | |
4319 global | |
4320 {not in Vi} | |
4321 {only in the GUI} | |
4322 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font | |
4323 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other. | |
4324 When non-zero there is room for underlining. | |
180 | 4325 With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have |
4326 space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set | |
4327 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems | |
4328 though! | |
7 | 4329 |
4330 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'* | |
4331 'lisp' boolean (default off) | |
4332 local to buffer | |
4333 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
4334 feature} | |
4335 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for | |
4336 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with | |
4337 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p' | |
4338 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or | |
4339 better. Also see 'lispwords'. | |
4340 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the | |
4341 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than | |
4342 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty. | |
4343 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
4344 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently} | |
4345 | |
4346 *'lispwords'* *'lw'* | |
4347 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long) | |
4348 global | |
4349 {not in Vi} | |
4350 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
4351 feature} | |
4352 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting. | |
4353 |'lisp'| | |
4354 | |
4355 *'list'* *'nolist'* | |
4356 'list' boolean (default off) | |
4357 local to window | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4358 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4359 line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4360 trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4361 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4362 The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4363 occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4364 position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4365 :set list lcs=tab\ \ |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4366 < |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4367 Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4368 or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for |
7 | 4369 changing the way tabs are displayed. |
4370 | |
4371 *'listchars'* *'lcs'* | |
4372 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$") | |
4373 global | |
4374 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 4375 Strings to use in 'list' mode. It is a comma separated list of string |
7 | 4376 settings. |
4377 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When | |
4378 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the | |
4379 line. | |
1263 | 4380 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a tab. The first |
7 | 4381 char is used once. The second char is repeated to |
1263 | 4382 fill the space that the tab normally occupies. |
4383 "tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as | |
4384 ">---". When omitted, a tab is show as ^I. | |
10 | 4385 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted, |
7 | 4386 trailing spaces are blank. |
4387 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is | |
4388 off and the line continues beyond the right of the | |
4389 screen. | |
4390 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap' | |
4391 is off and there is text preceding the character | |
4392 visible in the first column. | |
13 | 4393 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character |
856 | 4394 0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted. |
7 | 4395 |
10 | 4396 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can |
7 | 4397 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable |
819 | 4398 characters are allowed. All characters must be single width. |
7 | 4399 |
4400 Examples: > | |
4401 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:- | |
12 | 4402 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:% |
7 | 4403 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:< |
4404 < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and | |
12 | 4405 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail". |
1152 | 4406 |hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 4407 |
4408 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'* | |
4409 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on) | |
4410 global | |
4411 {not in Vi} | |
4412 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|. | |
4413 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading | |
4414 of plugins. | |
4415 Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments | |
4416 reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin| | |
4417 | |
842 | 4418 *'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'* |
4419 'macatsui' boolean (default on) | |
4420 global | |
4421 {only available in Mac GUI version} | |
4422 This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly. When set | |
4423 and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used. When | |
4424 not set ATSUI text drawing is not used. Switch this option off when | |
4425 you experience drawing problems. In a future version the problems may | |
4426 be solved and this option becomes obsolete. Therefore use this method | |
4427 to unset it: > | |
4428 if exists('&macatsui') | |
4429 set nomacatsui | |
4430 endif | |
1152 | 4431 < Another option to check if you have drawing problems is |
4432 'termencoding'. | |
4433 | |
7 | 4434 *'magic'* *'nomagic'* |
4435 'magic' boolean (default on) | |
4436 global | |
4437 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns. | |
4438 See |pattern|. | |
4439 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep | |
4440 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with | |
4441 old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when | |
20 | 4442 'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|. |
7 | 4443 |
4444 *'makeef'* *'mef'* | |
4445 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "") | |
4446 global | |
4447 {not in Vi} | |
4448 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
4449 feature} | |
4450 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|) | |
4451 and the |:grep| command. | |
4452 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used. | |
4453 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name | |
4454 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an | |
4455 existing file. | |
4456 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that. | |
4457 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
4458 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4459 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4460 security reasons. | |
4461 | |
4462 *'makeprg'* *'mp'* | |
4463 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS") | |
4464 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4465 {not in Vi} | |
1152 | 4466 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. |
4467 This option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded to | |
4468 the current and alternate file name. |:_%| |:_#| | |
4469 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| | |
4470 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4471 Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for | |
4472 the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter called | |
4473 "myfilter" do it like this: > | |
7 | 4474 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter |
4475 < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify | |
4476 where the arguments will be included, for example: > | |
4477 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*} | |
4478 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4479 security reasons. | |
4480 | |
4481 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'* | |
4482 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]") | |
4483 local to buffer | |
4484 {not in Vi} | |
4485 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the | |
1152 | 4486 other. Currently only single byte character pairs are allowed, and |
4487 they must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. | |
4488 The pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and | |
4489 '>' (HTML): > | |
7 | 4490 :set mps+=<:> |
4491 | |
4492 < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an | |
4493 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: > | |
4494 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:; | |
4495 | |
4496 < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in | |
4497 the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help| | |
4498 | |
4499 *'matchtime'* *'mat'* | |
4500 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5) | |
4501 global | |
4502 {not in Vi}{in Nvi} | |
4503 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is | |
4504 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that | |
4505 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi. | |
4506 | |
714 | 4507 *'maxcombine'* *'mco'* |
4508 'maxcombine' 'mco' number (default 2) | |
4509 global | |
4510 {not in Vi} | |
4511 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
4512 feature} | |
4513 The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying. | |
4514 Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8". | |
4515 The default is OK for most languages. Hebrew may require 4. | |
4516 Maximum value is 6. | |
4517 Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more | |
4518 combining characters, you just can't see them. Use |g8| or |ga|. | |
4519 See |mbyte-combining|. | |
4520 | |
7 | 4521 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'* |
4522 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100) | |
4523 global | |
4524 {not in Vi} | |
1152 | 4525 {not available when compiled without the +eval |
4526 feature} | |
7 | 4527 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally |
4528 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with | |
4529 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use | |
4530 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted. | |
4531 See also |:function|. | |
4532 | |
4533 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223* | |
4534 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000) | |
4535 global | |
4536 {not in Vi} | |
4537 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a | |
4538 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like | |
4539 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg", | |
4540 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also | |
4541 |key-mapping|. | |
4542 | |
4543 *'maxmem'* *'mm'* | |
4544 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system | |
4545 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
4546 available) | |
4547 global | |
4548 {not in Vi} | |
4549 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this | |
4550 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4551 other memory to be freed. The maximum usable value is about 2000000. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4552 Use this to work without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'. |
7 | 4553 |
189 | 4554 *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'* |
4555 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000) | |
4556 global | |
4557 {not in Vi} | |
4558 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4559 The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. |
189 | 4560 *E363* |
1152 | 4561 When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly |
4562 behaves like CTRL-C was typed. | |
189 | 4563 Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very |
4564 inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern | |
4565 "\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better. | |
4566 Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit. | |
4567 | |
7 | 4568 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'* |
4569 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system | |
4570 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
4571 available) | |
4572 global | |
4573 {not in Vi} | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4574 Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4575 The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4576 without a limit. On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4577 hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing? |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4578 Also see 'maxmem'. |
7 | 4579 |
4580 *'menuitems'* *'mis'* | |
4581 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25) | |
4582 global | |
4583 {not in Vi} | |
4584 {not available when compiled without the |+menu| | |
4585 feature} | |
4586 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are | |
4587 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this | |
4588 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first. | |
4589 | |
484 | 4590 *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'* |
4591 'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500") | |
4592 global | |
4593 {not in Vi} | |
4594 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
4595 feature} | |
4596 Parameters for |:mkspell|. This tunes when to start compressing the | |
4597 word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but | |
4598 it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used | |
4599 per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why | |
4600 this tuning is complicated. | |
4601 | |
4602 There are three numbers, separated by commas: | |
4603 {start},{inc},{added} | |
4604 | |
4605 For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start} | |
4606 gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any | |
4607 compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of | |
4608 memory that is available to Vim. | |
4609 | |
4610 When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the | |
4611 amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another | |
4612 compression is done. A low number means compression is done after | |
4613 less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory | |
4614 will be allocated. | |
4615 | |
4616 After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before | |
4617 the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra | |
4618 amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller | |
4619 chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's | |
4620 slower. | |
4621 | |
4622 The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and | |
4623 Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If | |
4624 you have 1 Gbyte you could use: > | |
4625 :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800 | |
4626 < If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some | |
4627 languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to. | |
4628 | |
7 | 4629 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'* |
1111 | 4630 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on (off for root), |
4631 Vi default: off) | |
7 | 4632 local to buffer |
4633 *'modelines'* *'mls'* | |
4634 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5) | |
4635 global | |
4636 {not in Vi} | |
4637 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is | |
4638 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero | |
4639 no lines are checked. See |modeline|. | |
4640 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
4641 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4642 | |
4643 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'* | |
4644 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on) | |
4645 local to buffer | |
4646 {not in Vi} *E21* | |
4647 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and | |
4648 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed. | |
4649 Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument. | |
4650 | |
4651 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'* | |
4652 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off) | |
4653 local to buffer | |
4654 {not in Vi} | |
4655 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set | |
4656 when: | |
4657 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the | |
4658 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the | |
4659 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the | |
4660 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from | |
4661 when it was written. | |
4662 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original | |
4663 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or | |
4664 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original | |
4665 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be | |
4666 reset. | |
4667 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but | |
4668 will be ignored. | |
4669 | |
4670 *'more'* *'nomore'* | |
4671 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
4672 global | |
4673 {not in Vi} | |
4674 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get | |
4675 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the | |
4676 listing continues until finished. | |
4677 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
4678 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4679 | |
4680 *'mouse'* *E538* | |
4681 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32) | |
4682 global | |
4683 {not in Vi} | |
4684 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals | |
1621 | 4685 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, *BSD console with |
4686 sysmouse and Linux console with gpm). For using the mouse in the | |
4687 GUI, see |gui-mouse|. | |
7 | 4688 The mouse can be enabled for different modes: |
4689 n Normal mode | |
4690 v Visual mode | |
4691 i Insert mode | |
4692 c Command-line mode | |
4693 h all previous modes when editing a help file | |
4694 a all previous modes | |
4695 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt | |
4696 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: > | |
4697 :set mouse=a | |
4698 < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for | |
4699 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor. | |
4700 | |
4701 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|. | |
4702 | |
4703 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the | |
10 | 4704 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of |
7 | 4705 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed. |
4706 Also see the 'clipboard' option. | |
4707 | |
4708 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'* | |
4709 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off) | |
4710 global | |
4711 {not in Vi} | |
4712 {only works in the GUI} | |
4713 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated. | |
4714 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the | |
4715 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the | |
4716 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as | |
4717 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally. | |
4718 | |
4719 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'* | |
4720 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on) | |
4721 global | |
4722 {not in Vi} | |
4723 {only works in the GUI} | |
4724 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed. | |
4725 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved. | |
4726 | |
4727 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'* | |
4728 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32) | |
4729 global | |
4730 {not in Vi} | |
4731 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what | |
4732 the right mouse button is used for: | |
4733 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works | |
4734 like in an xterm. | |
4735 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left | |
4736 mouse button extends a selection. This works like | |
233 | 4737 with Microsoft Windows. |
7 | 4738 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the |
4739 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the | |
4740 selected operation will act upon the clicked object. | |
4741 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will | |
233 | 4742 be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of |
7 | 4743 course, that right clicking outside a selection will |
4744 end Visual mode. | |
4745 Overview of what button does what for each model: | |
4746 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~ | |
4747 left click place cursor place cursor | |
4748 left drag start selection start selection | |
4749 shift-left search word extend selection | |
4750 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor) | |
4751 right drag extend selection - | |
4752 middle click paste paste | |
4753 | |
4754 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu. | |
4755 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|. | |
4756 | |
4757 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings. | |
4758 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless | |
4759 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly). | |
4760 | |
4761 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
4762 | |
4763 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547* | |
4764 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross, | |
233 | 4765 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow") |
7 | 4766 global |
4767 {not in Vi} | |
4768 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape| | |
4769 feature} | |
4770 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in | |
4771 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much | |
4772 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list | |
4773 and an argument-list: | |
4774 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,.. | |
4775 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations: | |
4776 In a normal window: ~ | |
4777 n Normal mode | |
4778 v Visual mode | |
4779 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
4780 if not specified) | |
4781 o Operator-pending mode | |
4782 i Insert mode | |
4783 r Replace mode | |
4784 | |
4785 Others: ~ | |
4786 c appending to the command-line | |
4787 ci inserting in the command-line | |
4788 cr replacing in the command-line | |
4789 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts | |
4790 ml idem, but cursor in the last line | |
4791 e any mode, pointer below last window | |
4792 s any mode, pointer on a status line | |
4793 sd any mode, while dragging a status line | |
4794 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line | |
4795 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line | |
4796 a everywhere | |
4797 | |
4798 The shape is one of the following: | |
4799 avail name looks like ~ | |
4800 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer | |
4801 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!) | |
4802 w x beam I-beam | |
4803 w x updown up-down sizing arrows | |
4804 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows | |
4805 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer | |
4806 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer | |
4807 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing | |
4808 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing | |
4809 x crosshair like a big thin + | |
4810 x hand1 black hand | |
4811 x hand2 white hand | |
4812 x pencil what you write with | |
4813 x question big ? | |
4814 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up | |
4815 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up | |
4816 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h) | |
4817 | |
4818 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32, | |
4819 x for X11. | |
4820 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse | |
4821 pointer. | |
4822 | |
4823 Example: > | |
4824 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no | |
4825 < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and | |
4826 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since | |
4827 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.) | |
4828 | |
4829 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'* | |
4830 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500) | |
4831 global | |
4832 {not in Vi} | |
4833 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum | |
4834 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be | |
4835 recognized as a multi click. | |
4836 | |
14 | 4837 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'* |
4838 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100) | |
4839 global | |
4840 {not in Vi} | |
4841 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme| | |
4842 feature} | |
4843 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads. | |
4844 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling. | |
4845 | |
7 | 4846 *'nrformats'* *'nf'* |
4847 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex") | |
4848 local to buffer | |
4849 {not in Vi} | |
4850 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the | |
4851 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number | |
4852 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands. | |
625 | 4853 alpha If included, single alphabetical characters will be |
7 | 4854 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a |
4855 letter index a), b), etc. | |
625 | 4856 octal If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered |
7 | 4857 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010". |
625 | 4858 hex If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be |
7 | 4859 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on |
4860 "0x100" results in "0x0ff". | |
4861 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always | |
4862 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not | |
4863 recognized as octal or hex. | |
4864 | |
4865 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'* | |
4866 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off) | |
4867 local to window | |
4868 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is | |
4869 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of | |
4870 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set). | |
13 | 4871 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
4872 number. | |
7 | 4873 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
4874 characters are put before the number. | |
4875 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number. | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4876 When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset. |
7 | 4877 |
13 | 4878 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'* |
4879 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8) | |
4880 local to window | |
14 | 4881 {not in Vi} |
4882 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak| | |
4883 feature} | |
13 | 4884 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4885 when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4886 with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4887 the text, there is one less character for the number itself. |
13 | 4888 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4889 fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4890 rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4891 is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4892 up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used. |
13 | 4893 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10. |
4894 NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set. | |
4895 | |
523 | 4896 *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'* |
4897 'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty) | |
502 | 4898 local to buffer |
4899 {not in Vi} | |
4900 {not available when compiled without the +eval | |
4901 or +insert_expand feature} | |
623 | 4902 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni |
4903 completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| | |
648 | 4904 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
4905 invoked and what it should return. | |
1004 | 4906 This option is usually set by a filetype plugin: |
859 | 4907 |:filetype-plugin-on| |
502 | 4908 |
4909 | |
1152 | 4910 *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'* |
1004 | 4911 'opendevice' 'odev' boolean (default off) |
4912 global | |
4913 {not in Vi} | |
4914 {only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
4915 Enable reading and writing from devices. This may get Vim stuck on a | |
4916 device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O. Therefore | |
4917 it is off by default. | |
4918 Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also | |
4919 result in editing a device. | |
4920 | |
4921 | |
593 | 4922 *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'* |
4923 'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty) | |
4924 global | |
4925 {not in Vi} | |
4926 This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator. | |
4927 See |:map-operator| for more info and an example. | |
4928 | |
4929 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4930 security reasons. | |
4931 | |
4932 | |
7 | 4933 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366* |
4934 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text", | |
4935 others default: "") | |
4936 local to buffer | |
4937 {not in Vi} | |
4938 {only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype| | |
4939 feature} | |
4940 Some operating systems store extra information about files besides | |
4941 name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra | |
4942 information, the nature of which will vary between systems. | |
4943 The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and | |
1698 | 4944 is used to set the operating system file type when file is written. |
7 | 4945 It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands. |
4946 |autocmd-osfiletypes| | |
4947 | |
4948 *'paragraphs'* *'para'* | |
1564 | 4949 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp") |
7 | 4950 global |
4951 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs | |
4952 of two letters (see |object-motions|). | |
4953 | |
4954 *'paste'* *'nopaste'* | |
4955 'paste' boolean (default off) | |
4956 global | |
4957 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 4958 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy |
4959 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid | |
7 | 4960 unexpected effects. |
4961 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim | |
10 | 4962 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim |
7 | 4963 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste' |
4964 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the | |
4965 mouse clicks itself. | |
148 | 4966 This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in |
4967 your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting | |
4968 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button | |
4969 will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping. | |
7 | 4970 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on): |
4971 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled | |
4972 - abbreviations are disabled | |
4973 - 'textwidth' is set to 0 | |
4974 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0 | |
4975 - 'autoindent' is reset | |
4976 - 'smartindent' is reset | |
4977 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0 | |
4978 - 'revins' is reset | |
4979 - 'ruler' is reset | |
4980 - 'showmatch' is reset | |
4981 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty | |
4982 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled: | |
4983 - 'lisp' | |
4984 - 'indentexpr' | |
4985 - 'cindent' | |
4986 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is | |
4987 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the | |
4988 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to | |
4989 set the 'paste' option again. | |
4990 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to | |
4991 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on. | |
4992 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect. | |
4993 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use | |
4994 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key. | |
4995 | |
4996 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'* | |
4997 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "") | |
4998 global | |
4999 {not in Vi} | |
5000 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste' | |
5001 option. This is like specifying a mapping: > | |
5002 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR> | |
5003 < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'. | |
5004 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set. | |
5005 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in | |
5006 Command-line mode. | |
5007 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However, | |
5008 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do | |
5009 this: > | |
5010 :map <F10> :set paste<CR> | |
5011 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR> | |
5012 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR> | |
5013 :imap <F11> <nop> | |
5014 :set pastetoggle=<F11> | |
5015 < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode. | |
5016 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste | |
5017 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key | |
5018 sequence. | |
1621 | 5019 When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies. |
7 | 5020 |
5021 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'* | |
5022 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "") | |
5023 global | |
5024 {not in Vi} | |
5025 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
5026 feature} | |
5027 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate | |
10 | 5028 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|. |
7 | 5029 |
5030 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206* | |
5031 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "") | |
5032 global | |
5033 {not in Vi} | |
5034 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used | |
5035 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a | |
5036 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a | |
5037 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the | |
5038 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option | |
5039 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like | |
5040 ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The | |
5041 backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has | |
5042 been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a | |
5043 backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is | |
5044 created. | |
5045 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made. | |
5046 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the | |
5047 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always | |
5048 recognized as a compressed file. | |
36 | 5049 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 5050 |
5051 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* | |
5052 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,," | |
5053 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,," | |
5054 other systems: ".,,") | |
5055 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
5056 {not in Vi} | |
5057 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1668 | 5058 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands, |
5059 provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not | |
5060 starting with "/", "./" or "../"). The directories in the 'path' | |
5061 option may be relative or absolute. | |
7 | 5062 - Use commas to separate directory names: > |
5063 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include | |
5064 < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards | |
5065 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory | |
5066 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: > | |
5067 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space | |
5068 < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra | |
5069 backslash: > | |
5070 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma | |
5071 < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: > | |
5072 :set path=. | |
5073 < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two | |
5074 commas: > | |
5075 :set path=,, | |
5076 < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'. | |
5077 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5078 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding | |
5079 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work. | |
1668 | 5080 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and |
5081 ";". See |file-searching| for info and syntax. | |
7 | 5082 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature} |
5083 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: > | |
5084 :set path=.,c:\\include | |
5085 < Or just use '/' instead: > | |
5086 :set path=.,c:/include | |
5087 < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as | |
5088 the file! | |
10 | 5089 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly |
7 | 5090 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. |
5091 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of | |
5092 'path', see |:checkpath|. | |
5093 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
5094 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
5095 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: > | |
5096 :set path-= | |
5097 < To add the current directory use: > | |
5098 :set path+= | |
5099 < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the | |
5100 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory | |
5101 names are separated with a semi-colon: > | |
5102 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g') | |
5103 < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that | |
5104 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space. | |
5105 | |
5106 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'* | |
5107 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off) | |
5108 local to buffer | |
5109 {not in Vi} | |
5110 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the | |
5111 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a | |
5112 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is | |
5113 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option | |
5114 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible | |
5115 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required. | |
1621 | 5116 'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains |
5117 a Tab. | |
7 | 5118 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of |
5119 tabs and spaces. You might not like this. | |
5120 NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
5121 Also see 'copyindent'. | |
5122 Use |:retab| to clean up white space. | |
5123 | |
5124 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'* | |
5125 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12) | |
5126 global | |
5127 {not in Vi} | |
5128 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
5129 |+quickfix| feature} | |
5130 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated | |
5131 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given. | |
5132 | |
5133 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'* | |
5134 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590* | |
5135 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off) | |
5136 local to window | |
5137 {not in Vi} | |
5138 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
5139 |+quickfix| feature} | |
10 | 5140 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option |
7 | 5141 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands |
5142 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc. | |
5143 | |
5144 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'* | |
5145 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty) | |
5146 global | |
5147 {not in Vi} | |
5148 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5149 feature} | |
15 | 5150 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5151 See |pdev-option|. | |
36 | 5152 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
5153 security reasons. | |
15 | 5154 |
5155 *'printencoding'* *'penc'* | |
5156 'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems) | |
7 | 5157 global |
5158 {not in Vi} | |
5159 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5160 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5161 Sets the character encoding used when printing. |
5162 See |penc-option|. | |
7 | 5163 |
5164 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'* | |
5165 'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below) | |
5166 global | |
5167 {not in Vi} | |
5168 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5169 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5170 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|. |
5171 See |pexpr-option|. | |
5172 | |
5173 *'printfont'* *'pfn'* | |
7 | 5174 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier") |
5175 global | |
5176 {not in Vi} | |
5177 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5178 feature} | |
15 | 5179 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5180 See |pfn-option|. | |
7 | 5181 |
5182 *'printheader'* *'pheader'* | |
5183 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N") | |
5184 global | |
5185 {not in Vi} | |
5186 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5187 feature} | |
15 | 5188 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output. |
5189 See |pheader-option|. | |
5190 | |
5191 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'* | |
5192 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "") | |
5193 global | |
5194 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 5195 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
5196 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 5197 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
5198 See |pmbcs-option|. | |
5199 | |
5200 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'* | |
5201 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "") | |
5202 global | |
5203 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 5204 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
5205 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 5206 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
5207 See |pmbfn-option|. | |
7 | 5208 |
5209 *'printoptions'* *'popt'* | |
5210 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "") | |
5211 global | |
5212 {not in Vi} | |
5213 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature} | |
15 | 5214 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|. |
5215 See |popt-option|. | |
5216 | |
168 | 5217 *'prompt'* *'noprompt'* |
5218 'prompt' boolean (default on) | |
5219 global | |
5220 When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode. | |
5221 | |
766 | 5222 *'pumheight'* *'ph'* |
5223 'pumheight' 'ph' number (default 0) | |
5224 global | |
5225 {not available when compiled without the | |
5226 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
5227 {not in Vi} | |
853 | 5228 Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for |
5229 Insert mode completion. When zero as much space as available is used. | |
766 | 5230 |ins-completion-menu|. |
5231 | |
5232 | |
140 | 5233 *'quoteescape'* *'qe'* |
12 | 5234 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\") |
5235 local to buffer | |
5236 {not in Vi} | |
5237 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for | |
5238 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|. | |
5239 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string, | |
5240 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the | |
5241 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string. | |
5242 | |
7 | 5243 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'* |
5244 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off) | |
5245 local to buffer | |
5246 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from | |
5247 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started | |
5248 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view". | |
164 | 5249 When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current |
5250 buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'. | |
7 | 5251 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is |
164 | 5252 set for the newly edited buffer. |
7 | 5253 |
1521 | 5254 *'redrawtime'* *'rdt'* |
5255 'redrawtime' 'rdt' number (default 2000) | |
5256 global | |
5257 {not in Vi} | |
5258 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| | |
5259 feature} | |
5260 The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display. This applies to | |
5261 searching for patterns for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting. | |
5262 When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further | |
5263 matches will be highlighted. This is used to avoid that Vim hangs | |
5264 when using a very complicated pattern. | |
5265 | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5266 *'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'* |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5267 'relativenumber' 'rnu' boolean (default off) |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5268 local to window |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5269 {not in Vi} |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5270 Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5271 each line. Relative line numbers help you using the |count| you can |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5272 precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5273 having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5274 other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5275 When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5276 line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5277 'compatible' isn't set). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5278 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5279 number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5280 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5281 characters are put before the number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5282 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5283 When setting this option, 'number' is reset. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5284 |
7 | 5285 *'remap'* *'noremap'* |
5286 'remap' boolean (default on) | |
5287 global | |
5288 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for | |
5289 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command. | |
717 | 5290 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep |
5291 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with | |
5292 old Vi scripts. | |
7 | 5293 |
5294 *'report'* | |
5295 'report' number (default 2) | |
5296 global | |
5297 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of | |
5298 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most | |
5299 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0. | |
5300 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used | |
5301 instead of the number of lines. | |
5302 | |
5303 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'* | |
5304 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on) | |
5305 global | |
5306 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version} | |
5307 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also | |
5308 happens when executing external commands. | |
5309 | |
5310 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te' | |
5311 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring: | |
5312 set t_ti= t_te= | |
5313 To enable restoring (for an xterm): | |
5314 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8 | |
5315 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it) | |
5316 | |
5317 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'* | |
5318 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off) | |
5319 global | |
5320 {not in Vi} | |
5321 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
5322 feature} | |
5323 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing | |
5324 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_ | |
5325 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set. | |
5326 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set. | |
5327 | |
5328 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'* | |
5329 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off) | |
5330 local to window | |
5331 {not in Vi} | |
5332 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
5333 feature} | |
5334 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters | |
5335 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left. | |
5336 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that | |
5337 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic. | |
5338 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files | |
5339 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is | |
5340 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left | |
5341 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly | |
5342 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|. | |
5343 | |
5344 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'* | |
5345 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search") | |
5346 local to window | |
5347 {not in Vi} | |
5348 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
5349 feature} | |
5350 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in | |
5351 right-to-left mode for a group of commands: | |
5352 | |
5353 search "/" and "?" commands | |
5354 | |
5355 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi. | |
5356 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect. | |
5357 | |
5358 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'* | |
5359 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off) | |
5360 global | |
5361 {not in Vi} | |
5362 {not available when compiled without the | |
5363 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
5364 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a | |
10 | 5365 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed |
7 | 5366 text in the file is shown on the far right: |
5367 Top first line is visible | |
5368 Bot last line is visible | |
5369 All first and last line are visible | |
5370 45% relative position in the file | |
5371 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler. | |
10 | 5372 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the |
7 | 5373 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the |
233 | 5374 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty), |
7 | 5375 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat' |
5376 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of | |
5377 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both | |
5378 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown, | |
5379 separated with a dash. | |
5380 For an empty line "0-1" is shown. | |
5381 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1". | |
5382 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set. | |
5383 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where | |
5384 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|. | |
5385 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
5386 | |
5387 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'* | |
5388 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty) | |
5389 global | |
5390 {not in Vi} | |
5391 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
5392 feature} | |
5393 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler | |
5394 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option. | |
692 | 5395 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
7 | 5396 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15 |
5397 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end. | |
5398 Example: > | |
5399 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%) | |
5400 < | |
5401 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles* | |
5402 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default: | |
5403 Unix: "$HOME/.vim, | |
5404 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5405 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5406 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
5407 $HOME/.vim/after" | |
5408 Amiga: "home:vimfiles, | |
5409 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5410 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5411 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
5412 home:vimfiles/after" | |
5413 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles, | |
5414 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5415 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5416 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
5417 $HOME/vimfiles/after" | |
5418 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles, | |
5419 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5420 $VIM:vimfiles:after" | |
5421 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles, | |
5422 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5423 Choices:vimfiles/after" | |
5424 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles, | |
5425 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
5426 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
5427 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
233 | 5428 sys$login:vimfiles/after") |
7 | 5429 global |
5430 {not in Vi} | |
5431 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime | |
5432 files: | |
5433 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype| | |
5434 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts| | |
164 | 5435 autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions| |
7 | 5436 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme| |
5437 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler| | |
5438 doc/ documentation |write-local-help| | |
5439 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin| | |
5440 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression| | |
5441 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap| | |
5442 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans| | |
5443 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim| | |
5444 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin| | |
5445 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding| | |
650 | 5446 spell/ spell checking files |spell| |
7 | 5447 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile| |
5448 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor| | |
5449 | |
5450 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command. | |
5451 | |
5452 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations: | |
5453 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences. | |
5454 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system | |
5455 administrator. | |
5456 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim. | |
5457 *after-directory* | |
5458 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is | |
5459 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed | |
5460 defaults (rarely needed) | |
5461 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for | |
5462 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults | |
5463 or system-wide settings (rarely needed). | |
5464 | |
5465 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal | |
5466 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for | |
10 | 5467 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid |
7 | 5468 wildcards. |
5469 See |:runtime|. | |
5470 Example: > | |
5471 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME | |
5472 < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your | |
5473 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a | |
5474 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime | |
5475 files). | |
5476 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the | |
5477 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME | |
5478 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put | |
5479 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed | |
5480 runtime files. | |
5481 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5482 security reasons. | |
5483 | |
5484 *'scroll'* *'scr'* | |
5485 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height) | |
5486 local to window | |
5487 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be | |
5488 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size | |
5489 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will | |
10 | 5490 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window |
7 | 5491 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives |
5492 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference | |
5493 when lines wrap} | |
5494 | |
5495 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'* | |
5496 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off) | |
5497 local to window | |
5498 {not in Vi} | |
5499 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind| | |
5500 feature} | |
5501 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current | |
5502 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have | |
5503 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the | |
5504 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'. | |
5505 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be | |
5506 interpreted. | |
5507 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another | |
5508 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows | |
5509 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not. | |
5510 | |
5511 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'* | |
5512 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1) | |
5513 global | |
5514 {not in Vi} | |
5515 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the | |
5516 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E, | |
5517 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly. | |
532 | 5518 When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the |
5519 percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window | |
5520 height. | |
7 | 5521 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set. |
5522 | |
5523 *'scrolloff'* *'so'* | |
5524 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0) | |
5525 global | |
5526 {not in Vi} | |
5527 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor. | |
5528 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If | |
5529 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be | |
5530 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or | |
5531 when long lines wrap). | |
5532 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'. | |
5533 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
5534 | |
5535 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'* | |
5536 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump") | |
5537 global | |
5538 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind| | |
5539 feature} | |
5540 {not in Vi} | |
5541 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how | |
236 | 5542 'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind |
5543 Options. | |
7 | 5544 The following words are available: |
5545 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
5546 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
5547 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical | |
5548 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first | |
5549 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving | |
5550 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may | |
5551 reach a position before the start or after the end of | |
5552 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when | |
5553 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll | |
5554 to the desired position when possible. | |
5555 When now making that window the current one, two | |
5556 things can be done with the relative offset: | |
5557 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is | |
5558 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current | |
5559 window. When going back to the other window, the | |
1152 | 5560 new relative offset will be used. |
7 | 5561 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are |
5562 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When | |
5563 going back to the other window, it still uses the | |
5564 same relative offset. | |
5565 Also see |scroll-binding|. | |
819 | 5566 When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding, |
5567 even when "ver" isn't there. | |
7 | 5568 |
5569 *'sections'* *'sect'* | |
5570 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh") | |
5571 global | |
5572 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of | |
5573 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start | |
5574 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh". | |
5575 | |
5576 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523* | |
5577 'secure' boolean (default off) | |
5578 global | |
5579 {not in Vi} | |
5580 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in | |
5581 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are | |
5582 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into | |
5583 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is | |
5584 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be | |
10 | 5585 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set |
7 | 5586 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then. |
5587 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5588 security reasons. | |
5589 | |
5590 *'selection'* *'sel'* | |
5591 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive") | |
5592 global | |
5593 {not in Vi} | |
5594 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used | |
5595 in Visual and Select mode. | |
5596 Possible values: | |
5597 value past line inclusive ~ | |
5598 old no yes | |
5599 inclusive yes yes | |
5600 exclusive yes no | |
5601 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one | |
5602 character past the line. | |
5603 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included | |
5604 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the | |
5605 selection. | |
5606 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end | |
5607 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when | |
5608 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty. | |
5609 | |
5610 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
5611 | |
5612 *'selectmode'* *'slm'* | |
5613 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "") | |
5614 global | |
5615 {not in Vi} | |
5616 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start | |
5617 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started. | |
5618 Possible values: | |
5619 mouse when using the mouse | |
5620 key when using shifted special keys | |
5621 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V | |
5622 See |Select-mode|. | |
5623 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
5624 | |
5625 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'* | |
5626 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds, | |
827 | 5627 help,options,tabpages,winsize") |
7 | 5628 global |
5629 {not in Vi} | |
5630 {not available when compiled without the +mksession | |
5631 feature} | |
5632 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma | |
5633 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring | |
5634 something: | |
5635 word save and restore ~ | |
5636 blank empty windows | |
5637 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows | |
5638 curdir the current directory | |
5639 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
5640 fold options | |
5641 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter | |
75 | 5642 and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only |
5643 String and Number types are stored. | |
7 | 5644 help the help window |
5645 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
5646 global values for local options) | |
5647 options all options and mappings (also global values for local | |
5648 options) | |
5649 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns' | |
5650 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located | |
5651 will become the current directory (useful with | |
5652 projects accessed over a network from different | |
5653 systems) | |
5654 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward | |
5655 slashes | |
827 | 5656 tabpages all tab pages; without this only the current tab page |
5657 is restored, so that you can make a session for each | |
5658 tab page separately | |
7 | 5659 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when |
5660 on Windows or DOS | |
5661 winpos position of the whole Vim window | |
5662 winsize window sizes | |
5663 | |
5664 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5665 When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5666 with absolute paths. |
7 | 5667 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files |
5668 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
5669 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
5670 | |
5671 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91* | |
5672 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh", | |
5673 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or | |
5674 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd") | |
5675 global | |
5676 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the | |
5677 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash' | |
5678 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'. | |
10 | 5679 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f". |
7 | 5680 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
5681 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5682 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose | |
5683 it in quotes. Example: > | |
5684 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f | |
5685 < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and | |
10 | 5686 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the |
7 | 5687 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command |
5688 name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path | |
5689 separators. | |
5690 For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment | |
5691 variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the | |
5692 libc.inf file of DJGPP. | |
5693 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be | |
5694 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com" | |
5695 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g., | |
5696 filtering). | |
5697 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is | |
5698 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: > | |
5699 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos | |
5700 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5701 security reasons. | |
5702 | |
5703 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'* | |
5704 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' | |
5705 does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c") | |
5706 global | |
5707 {not in Vi} | |
5708 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g., | |
5709 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like | |
5710 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to | |
5711 reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for | |
5712 OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about | |
5713 including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|. | |
5714 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5715 security reasons. | |
5716 | |
5717 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'* | |
5718 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee") | |
5719 global | |
5720 {not in Vi} | |
5721 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
5722 feature} | |
5723 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the | |
10 | 5724 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about |
7 | 5725 including spaces and backslashes. |
5726 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
5727 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
5728 of this option). | |
5729 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly | |
5730 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen. | |
5731 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved | |
5732 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or | |
5733 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the | |
5734 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes | |
2152 | 5735 "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included. Before using |
5736 the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh". | |
7 | 5737 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" |
5738 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
5739 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was | |
5740 explicitly set before. | |
5741 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the | |
5742 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg' | |
5743 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do | |
5744 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space. | |
5745 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ". | |
5746 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
5747 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
5748 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5749 security reasons. | |
5750 | |
5751 *'shellquote'* *'shq'* | |
5752 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' | |
5753 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"") | |
5754 global | |
5755 {not in Vi} | |
5756 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
5757 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the | |
5758 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's | |
5759 probably not useful to set both options. | |
5760 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for | |
5761 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell | |
5762 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according | |
5763 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the | |
5764 user. See |dos-shell|. | |
5765 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5766 security reasons. | |
5767 | |
5768 *'shellredir'* *'srr'* | |
5769 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1") | |
5770 global | |
5771 {not in Vi} | |
5772 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary | |
5773 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces | |
5774 and backslashes. | |
5775 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
5776 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
5777 of this option). | |
5778 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh" | |
5779 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the | |
5780 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes | |
5781 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included. | |
5782 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked | |
5783 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with | |
5784 ".exe" appended are checked for. | |
5785 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" | |
5786 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
5787 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was | |
5788 explicitly set before. | |
5789 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
5790 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
5791 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5792 security reasons. | |
5793 | |
5794 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'* | |
5795 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off) | |
5796 global | |
5797 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
5798 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is | |
5799 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or | |
5800 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to | |
5801 forward slashes by Vim. | |
5802 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some | |
5803 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening | |
5804 any file for best results. This might change in the future. | |
5805 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path | |
5806 separator. To test if this is so use: > | |
5807 if exists('+shellslash') | |
5808 < | |
168 | 5809 *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'* |
5810 'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on) | |
5811 global | |
5812 {not in Vi} | |
5813 When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe. | |
5814 When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway. | |
5815 Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix. You can check it with: > | |
5816 :if has("filterpipe") | |
5817 < The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file | |
5818 and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection. | |
5819 The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding | |
5820 can be detected. | |
5821 The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|, | |
5822 |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when | |
5823 'shelltemp' is off. | |
5824 | |
7 | 5825 *'shelltype'* *'st'* |
5826 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0) | |
5827 global | |
5828 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga} | |
5829 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work | |
5830 which use a shell. | |
5831 0 and 1: always use the shell | |
5832 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines | |
5833 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command | |
5834 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly. | |
5835 | |
5836 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands | |
5837 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands | |
5838 | |
5839 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'* | |
5840 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: ""; | |
5841 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh" | |
5842 somewhere: "\"" | |
5843 for Unix, when using system(): "\"") | |
5844 global | |
5845 {not in Vi} | |
5846 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
5847 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See | |
5848 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful | |
5849 to set both options. | |
5850 This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for | |
5851 third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn | |
5852 Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted | |
5853 according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option | |
5854 by the user. See |dos-shell|. | |
5855 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5856 security reasons. | |
5857 | |
5858 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'* | |
5859 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off) | |
5860 global | |
5861 {not in Vi} | |
5862 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and < | |
5863 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to | |
5864 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible). | |
5865 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
5866 | |
5867 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'* | |
5868 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8) | |
5869 local to buffer | |
10 | 5870 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for |
7 | 5871 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc. |
5872 | |
5873 *'shortmess'* *'shm'* | |
168 | 5874 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "", |
5875 POSIX default: "A") | |
7 | 5876 global |
5877 {not in Vi} | |
5878 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file | |
5879 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages. | |
5880 It is a list of flags: | |
5881 flag meaning when present ~ | |
5882 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)" | |
5883 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]" | |
5884 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters" | |
5885 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]" | |
5886 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]" | |
5887 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]" | |
5888 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message | |
5889 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command | |
5890 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of | |
5891 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]". | |
5892 a all of the above abbreviations | |
5893 | |
5894 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message | |
5895 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on) | |
5896 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message. | |
5897 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn"). | |
5898 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search | |
5899 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages | |
5900 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit | |
5901 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column. | |
5902 Ignored in Ex mode. | |
5903 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to | |
233 | 5904 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle. |
7 | 5905 Ignored in Ex mode. |
5906 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file | |
5907 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file | |
5908 is found. | |
5909 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|. | |
5910 | |
5911 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers | |
5912 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as | |
5913 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you | |
5914 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!" | |
5915 Useful values: | |
5916 shm= No abbreviation of message. | |
5917 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information. | |
5918 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary. | |
5919 | |
5920 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
5921 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
5922 | |
5923 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'* | |
5924 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off) | |
5925 local to buffer | |
5926 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions} | |
5927 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3 | |
5928 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this | |
5929 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when | |
5930 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available | |
5931 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful | |
5932 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos | |
5933 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this | |
5934 option is always on by default. | |
5935 | |
5936 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595* | |
5937 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "") | |
5938 global | |
5939 {not in Vi} | |
5940 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
5941 feature} | |
5942 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5943 values are "> " or "+++ ": > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5944 :set showbreak=>\ |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5945 < Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5946 this: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5947 :let &showbreak = '+++ ' |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5948 < Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and |
7 | 5949 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the |
5950 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line). | |
5951 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in | |
5952 'highlight'. | |
5953 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently. | |
5954 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the | |
5955 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'. | |
5956 | |
5957 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'* | |
5958 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default: | |
5959 off) | |
5960 global | |
5961 {not in Vi} | |
5962 {not available when compiled without the | |
5963 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
1152 | 5964 Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen. Set this |
5965 option off if your terminal is slow. | |
7 | 5966 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown: |
5967 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters. | |
5968 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5969 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5970 {lines}x{columns}. |
7 | 5971 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
5972 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
5973 | |
5974 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'* | |
5975 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off) | |
5976 global | |
5977 {not in Vi} | |
5978 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the | |
5979 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search | |
10 | 5980 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have |
7 | 5981 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are |
5982 required (coding style permitting). | |
1621 | 5983 Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in |
5984 'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not | |
5985 match the typed text. | |
7 | 5986 |
5987 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'* | |
5988 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off) | |
5989 global | |
5990 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The | |
5991 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to | |
5992 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'. | |
5993 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be | |
5994 seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set. | |
5995 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character | |
5996 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs. | |
5997 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and | |
5998 blinking when showing the match. | |
5999 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show | |
6000 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite | |
6001 matches. | |
699 | 6002 Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving |
6003 around |pi_paren.txt|. | |
6004 Note: Use of the short form is rated PG. | |
7 | 6005 |
6006 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'* | |
6007 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
6008 global | |
6009 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line. | |
6010 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for | |
6011 this message. | |
10 | 6012 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this |
7 | 6013 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is |
6014 not set. | |
6015 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
6016 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6017 | |
677 | 6018 *'showtabline'* *'stal'* |
6019 'showtabline' 'stal' number (default 1) | |
6020 global | |
6021 {not in Vi} | |
6022 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
6023 feature} | |
6024 The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels | |
6025 will be displayed: | |
6026 0: never | |
6027 1: only if there are at least two tab pages | |
6028 2: always | |
6029 This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages | |
6030 line. | |
6031 See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages. | |
6032 | |
7 | 6033 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'* |
6034 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0) | |
6035 global | |
6036 {not in Vi} | |
6037 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when | |
6038 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen. | |
6039 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen. | |
6040 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using | |
6041 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl" | |
6042 commands. | |
6043 | |
6044 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'* | |
6045 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0) | |
6046 global | |
6047 {not in Vi} | |
6048 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the | |
534 | 6049 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a |
6050 value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero | |
6051 value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in | |
6052 horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option | |
6053 to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor | |
6054 horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too | |
6055 close to the beginning of the line. | |
7 | 6056 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
6057 | |
6058 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as | |
6059 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move | |
6060 onto the "extends" character: | |
6061 | |
6062 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:< | |
6063 :set sidescrolloff=1 | |
6064 | |
6065 | |
6066 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'* | |
6067 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off) | |
6068 global | |
6069 {not in Vi} | |
6070 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper | |
6071 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and | |
6072 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N", | |
10 | 6073 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After |
7 | 6074 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, |
6075 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>. | |
6076 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6077 | |
6078 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'* | |
6079 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off) | |
6080 local to buffer | |
6081 {not in Vi} | |
6082 {not available when compiled without the | |
6083 |+smartindent| feature} | |
6084 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like | |
6085 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does | |
6086 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict, | |
6087 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect. | |
6088 'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative. | |
6089 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'. | |
6090 An indent is automatically inserted: | |
6091 - After a line ending in '{'. | |
6092 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'. | |
6093 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command). | |
6094 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is | |
6095 given the same indent as the matching '{'. | |
6096 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for | |
6097 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent | |
10 | 6098 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this |
7 | 6099 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H. |
6100 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted | |
6101 right. | |
10 | 6102 NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste' |
7 | 6103 is set smart indenting is disabled. |
6104 | |
6105 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'* | |
6106 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off) | |
6107 global | |
6108 {not in Vi} | |
6109 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to | |
648 | 6110 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places. A |
6111 <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the | |
6112 line. | |
650 | 6113 When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or |
648 | 6114 'softtabstop'. 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or |
6115 right |shift-left-right|. | |
1263 | 6116 What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab' |
7 | 6117 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the |
11 | 6118 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. |
7 | 6119 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
6120 | |
6121 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'* | |
6122 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0) | |
6123 local to buffer | |
6124 {not in Vi} | |
6125 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing | |
6126 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like | |
6127 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is | |
6128 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value | |
6129 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However, | |
6130 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters. | |
6131 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off. | |
6132 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. | |
6133 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of | |
6134 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. | |
6135 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is | |
6136 set. | |
6137 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
6138 | |
221 | 6139 *'spell'* *'nospell'* |
6140 'spell' boolean (default off) | |
6141 local to window | |
6142 {not in Vi} | |
6143 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6144 feature} | |
6145 When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|. | |
236 | 6146 The languages are specified with 'spelllang'. |
221 | 6147 |
386 | 6148 *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'* |
389 | 6149 'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+") |
386 | 6150 local to buffer |
6151 {not in Vi} | |
6152 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6153 feature} | |
6154 Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be | |
6155 checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted | |
484 | 6156 with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled). |
386 | 6157 When this check is not wanted make this option empty. |
6158 Only used when 'spell' is set. | |
389 | 6159 Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about |
6160 including spaces and backslashes. | |
480 | 6161 To set this option automatically depending on the language, see |
6162 |set-spc-auto|. | |
386 | 6163 |
314 | 6164 *'spellfile'* *'spf'* |
6165 'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty) | |
6166 local to buffer | |
6167 {not in Vi} | |
6168 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6169 feature} | |
6170 Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw| | |
401 | 6171 commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the |
6172 path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory. | |
386 | 6173 *E765* |
6174 It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the | |
6175 |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each. This allows using | |
6176 a personal word list file and a project word list file. | |
314 | 6177 When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for |
819 | 6178 you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable. If |
6179 there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created. For the file | |
6180 name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, | |
353 | 6181 ignoring the region. |
6182 The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not | |
6183 have to appear in 'spelllang'. | |
6184 Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region | |
6185 name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when | |
6186 'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files | |
6187 without region name will be found. | |
336 | 6188 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6189 security reasons. | |
314 | 6190 |
221 | 6191 *'spelllang'* *'spl'* |
314 | 6192 'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en") |
221 | 6193 local to buffer |
6194 {not in Vi} | |
6195 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6196 feature} | |
353 | 6197 A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is |
6198 on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example: > | |
6199 set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical | |
6200 < This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words | |
6201 that are not recognized will be highlighted. | |
6202 The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is | |
6203 recommended to separate the two letter language name from a | |
6204 specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words. | |
6205 A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is | |
6206 the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one | |
6207 region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian | |
6208 English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great | |
6209 Britain. | |
484 | 6210 *E757* |
419 | 6211 As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The |
6212 first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name | |
6213 (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter). | |
6214 This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct | |
6215 encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it. | |
236 | 6216 When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good |
419 | 6217 idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the |
6218 files twice. | |
353 | 6219 How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|. |
221 | 6220 |
653 | 6221 If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name |
6222 for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin | |
6223 will ask you if you want to download the file. | |
6224 | |
480 | 6225 After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files |
6226 "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang' | |
650 | 6227 up to the first comma, dot or underscore. |
6228 Also see |set-spc-auto|. | |
480 | 6229 |
6230 | |
344 | 6231 *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'* |
6232 'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best") | |
6233 global | |
6234 {not in Vi} | |
6235 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6236 feature} | |
593 | 6237 Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the |z=| command and |
374 | 6238 the |spellsuggest()| function. This is a comma-separated list of |
6239 items: | |
6240 | |
6241 best Internal method that works best for English. Finds | |
6242 changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like | |
6243 scoring to improve the ordering. | |
6244 | |
6245 double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the | |
6246 results. The first method is "fast", the other method | |
344 | 6247 computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad |
374 | 6248 word. That only works when the language specifies |
6249 sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give | |
6250 better results. | |
6251 | |
6252 fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes: | |
6253 character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for | |
6254 simple typing mistakes. | |
6255 | |
593 | 6256 {number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|. |
484 | 6257 Not used for |spellsuggest()|. The number of |
6258 suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines' | |
6259 minus two. | |
6260 | |
374 | 6261 file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns, |
6262 separated by a slash. The first column contains the | |
6263 bad word, the second column the suggested good word. | |
6264 Example: | |
6265 theribal/terrible ~ | |
6266 Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the | |
6267 top of the suggestion list with the internal methods. | |
6268 Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for | |
6269 comments. | |
6270 The file is used for all languages. | |
6271 | |
6272 expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid | |
6273 trouble with spaces. |v:val| holds the badly spelled | |
6274 word. The expression must evaluate to a List of | |
6275 Lists, each with a suggestion and a score. | |
6276 Example: | |
6277 [['the', 33], ['that', 44]] | |
593 | 6278 Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the |
374 | 6279 internal methods use. A lower score is better. |
6280 This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily | |
6281 set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part. | |
6282 Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the | |
6283 'verbose' option to a non-zero value. | |
6284 | |
6285 Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may | |
6286 appear several times in any order. Example: > | |
6287 :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest() | |
6288 < | |
6289 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6290 security reasons. | |
344 | 6291 |
6292 | |
7 | 6293 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'* |
6294 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off) | |
6295 global | |
6296 {not in Vi} | |
6297 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
6298 feature} | |
6299 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current | |
6300 one. |:split| | |
6301 | |
6302 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'* | |
6303 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off) | |
6304 global | |
6305 {not in Vi} | |
6306 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit | |
6307 feature} | |
6308 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the | |
6309 current one. |:vsplit| | |
6310 | |
6311 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'* | |
6312 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on) | |
6313 global | |
6314 {not in Vi} | |
6315 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first | |
11 | 6316 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column |
10 | 6317 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, |
11 | 6318 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>" |
7 | 6319 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing |
6320 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that | |
6321 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+". | |
6322 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column | |
6323 where it was the last time the buffer was edited. | |
6324 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
6325 | |
6326 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542* | |
6327 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty) | |
40 | 6328 global or local to window |global-local| |
7 | 6329 {not in Vi} |
6330 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
6331 feature} | |
6332 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line. | |
6333 Also see |status-line|. | |
6334 | |
6335 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with | |
6336 normal text. Each status line item is of the form: | |
6337 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item} | |
6338 All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can | |
6339 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified. | |
6340 | |
680 | 6341 When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression, |
6342 evaluated and the result is used as the option value. Example: > | |
6343 :set statusline=%!MyStatusLine() | |
6344 < The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too. | |
6345 | |
6346 When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made | |
6347 empty to avoid further errors. Otherwise screen updating would loop. | |
6348 | |
7 | 6349 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and |
6350 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|. | |
6351 | |
6352 field meaning ~ | |
233 | 6353 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified |
7 | 6354 when minwid is larger than the length of the item. |
233 | 6355 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'. |
7 | 6356 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'. |
6357 Value must be 50 or less. | |
10 | 6358 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<' |
7 | 6359 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be |
6360 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number | |
6361 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like | |
6362 an exponential notation. | |
6363 item A one letter code as described below. | |
6364 | |
6365 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The | |
6366 second character in "item" is the type: | |
6367 N for number | |
6368 S for string | |
6369 F for flags as described below | |
6370 - not applicable | |
6371 | |
6372 item meaning ~ | |
1152 | 6373 f S Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current |
6374 directory. | |
7 | 6375 F S Full path to the file in the buffer. |
6376 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer. | |
1698 | 6377 m F Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off. |
7 | 6378 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-". |
1698 | 6379 r F Readonly flag, text is "[RO]". |
7 | 6380 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO". |
1698 | 6381 h F Help buffer flag, text is "[help]". |
7 | 6382 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP". |
1698 | 6383 w F Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]". |
7 | 6384 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV". |
1698 | 6385 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]". See 'filetype'. |
7 | 6386 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'. |
6387 {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature} | |
6388 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are | |
6389 being used: "<keymap>" | |
6390 n N Buffer number. | |
6391 b N Value of byte under cursor. | |
6392 B N As above, in hexadecimal. | |
6393 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1. | |
6394 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added) | |
6395 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature} | |
6396 O N As above, in hexadecimal. | |
233 | 6397 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.) |
7 | 6398 l N Line number. |
6399 L N Number of lines in buffer. | |
6400 c N Column number. | |
6401 v N Virtual column number. | |
10 | 6402 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'. |
7 | 6403 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|. |
6404 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the | |
6405 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length. | |
233 | 6406 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max}) |
7 | 6407 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one. |
680 | 6408 { NF Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result. |
625 | 6409 Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'. |
7 | 6410 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and |
6411 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere. | |
6412 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed. | |
681 | 6413 T N For 'tabline': start of tab page N label. Use %T after the last |
6414 label. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
6415 X N For 'tabline': start of close tab N label. Use %X after the | |
6416 label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X. Use %999X for a "close current tab" | |
6417 mark. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
7 | 6418 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start. |
6419 No width fields allowed. | |
6420 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items. | |
6421 No width fields allowed. | |
680 | 6422 # - Set highlight group. The name must follow and then a # again. |
6423 Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname. The same | |
6424 highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current | |
6425 windows. | |
7 | 6426 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the |
233 | 6427 minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*. |
7 | 6428 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied |
6429 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows. | |
6430 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9| | |
6431 | |
1698 | 6432 When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when |
6433 that flag comes right after plaintext. This will make a nice display | |
6434 when flags are used like in the examples below. | |
7 | 6435 |
233 | 6436 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are |
7 | 6437 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will |
6438 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear | |
6439 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. > | |
6440 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)... | |
6441 < | |
6442 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status | |
6443 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set | |
6444 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is | |
233 | 6445 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context. |
7 | 6446 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the |
634 | 6447 real current buffer. |
6448 | |
6449 The 'statusline' option may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see | |
6450 |sandbox-option|. | |
6451 | |
6452 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
6453 evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|. | |
7 | 6454 |
6455 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting | |
6456 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by | |
6457 setting an option without changing its value. Example: > | |
6458 :let &ro = &ro | |
6459 | |
6460 < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes. | |
6461 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules | |
6462 described above. | |
6463 | |
199 | 6464 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable! |
7 | 6465 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and |
6466 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right. | |
6467 | |
6468 Examples: | |
6469 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set > | |
6470 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P | |
6471 < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") > | |
6472 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P | |
6473 < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. > | |
6474 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b' | |
6475 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red | |
6476 < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded > | |
6477 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h... | |
6478 < In the |:autocmd|'s: > | |
6479 :let b:gzflag = 1 | |
6480 < And: > | |
6481 :unlet b:gzflag | |
6482 < And define this function: > | |
6483 :function VarExists(var, val) | |
6484 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif | |
6485 :endfunction | |
6486 < | |
6487 *'suffixes'* *'su'* | |
6488 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj") | |
6489 global | |
6490 {not in Vi} | |
6491 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files | |
6492 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the | |
10 | 6493 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as |
6494 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a | |
7 | 6495 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about |
6496 including spaces and backslashes). | |
6497 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files. | |
6498 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
6499 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
6500 uses another default. | |
6501 | |
6502 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'* | |
6503 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "") | |
6504 local to buffer | |
6505 {not in Vi} | |
6506 {not available when compiled without the | |
6507 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
6508 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a | |
6509 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: > | |
6510 :set suffixesadd=.java | |
6511 < | |
6512 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'* | |
6513 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on) | |
6514 local to buffer | |
6515 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 6516 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a |
7 | 6517 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with |
6518 confidential information that even root must not be able to access. | |
6519 Careful: All text will be in memory: | |
6520 - Don't use this for big files. | |
6521 - Recovery will be impossible! | |
6522 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and | |
6523 'swapfile' is set. | |
6524 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is | |
6525 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is | |
6526 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created. | |
6527 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|. | |
6528 | |
6529 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to | |
6530 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
6531 | |
6532 *'swapsync'* *'sws'* | |
6533 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync") | |
6534 global | |
6535 {not in Vi} | |
6536 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after | |
10 | 6537 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems. |
7 | 6538 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and |
6539 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work. | |
6540 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it, | |
6541 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some | |
6542 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system | |
6543 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default | |
6544 fsync(), which may work better on some systems. | |
36 | 6545 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file. |
7 | 6546 |
6547 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'* | |
6548 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "") | |
6549 global | |
6550 {not in Vi} | |
6551 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers. | |
6552 Possible values (comma separated list): | |
6553 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that | |
6554 contains the specified buffer (if there is one). | |
6555 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows. | |
6556 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when | |
6557 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is | |
6558 also used in all buffer related split commands, for | |
6559 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind". | |
825 | 6560 usetab Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab |
856 | 6561 pages. |
7 | 6562 split If included, split the current window before loading |
233 | 6563 a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window. |
7 | 6564 Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors. |
1621 | 6565 newtab Like "split", but open a new tab page. Overrules |
6566 "split" when both are present. | |
7 | 6567 |
410 | 6568 *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'* |
6569 'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000) | |
6570 local to buffer | |
6571 {not in Vi} | |
6572 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6573 feature} | |
419 | 6574 Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the |
6575 text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not | |
6576 be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared. | |
410 | 6577 This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one |
6578 long line. | |
6579 Set to zero to remove the limit. | |
6580 | |
7 | 6581 *'syntax'* *'syn'* |
6582 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty) | |
6583 local to buffer | |
6584 {not in Vi} | |
6585 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
6586 feature} | |
6587 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless | |
6588 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off". | |
6589 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the | |
6590 b:current_syntax variable does). | |
6591 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is | |
782 | 6592 not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file: |
6593 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~ | |
6594 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
6595 names. Example: | |
6596 /* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
6597 This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax. | |
6598 Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition, | |
6599 otherwise it will be skipped. More than one dot may appear. | |
6600 To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: > | |
7 | 6601 :set syntax=OFF |
6602 < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the | |
6603 'filetype' option: > | |
6604 :set syntax=ON | |
6605 < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the | |
6606 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument. | |
6607 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or | |
6608 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 6609 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 6610 |
699 | 6611 *'tabline'* *'tal'* |
677 | 6612 'tabline' 'tal' string (default empty) |
674 | 6613 global |
6614 {not in Vi} | |
6615 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
6616 feature} | |
677 | 6617 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages |
6618 line at the top of the Vim window. When empty Vim will use a default | |
681 | 6619 tab pages line. See |setting-tabline| for more info. |
677 | 6620 |
6621 The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline' | |
688 | 6622 option and only when there is no GUI tab line. When 'e' is in |
6623 'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used | |
6624 instead. | |
677 | 6625 |
6626 The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'. You can use | |
6627 |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out | |
681 | 6628 the text to be displayed. Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for |
6629 the second one, etc. Use "%X" items for closing labels. | |
677 | 6630 |
6631 Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others | |
6632 are invisible and you can't jump to their windows. | |
6633 | |
674 | 6634 |
699 | 6635 *'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'* |
6636 'tabpagemax' 'tpm' number (default 10) | |
6637 global | |
6638 {not in Vi} | |
6639 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
6640 feature} | |
6641 Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line | |
6642 argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage| | |
6643 | |
6644 | |
6645 *'tabstop'* *'ts'* | |
7 | 6646 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8) |
6647 local to buffer | |
6648 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see | |
6649 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option. | |
6650 | |
6651 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file | |
6652 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it). | |
6653 | |
6654 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim: | |
6655 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4 | |
6656 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim | |
1263 | 6657 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will |
7 | 6658 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters. |
6659 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use | |
6660 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The | |
6661 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed. | |
6662 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a | |
10 | 6663 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only |
7 | 6664 works when using Vim to edit the file. |
6665 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and | |
6666 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only) | |
6667 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have | |
6668 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this | |
6669 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is | |
6670 changed. | |
6671 | |
6672 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'* | |
6673 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on) | |
6674 global | |
6675 {not in Vi} | |
6676 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either | |
10 | 6677 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary |
7 | 6678 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search |
6679 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted. | |
6680 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that | |
6681 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the | |
6682 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off. | |
6683 | |
6684 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags | |
10 | 6685 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for |
7 | 6686 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When |
6687 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done. | |
6688 | |
6689 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line | |
6690 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: > | |
1621 | 6691 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some comment/ |
7 | 6692 < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>] |
6693 | |
6694 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the | |
6695 files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used | |
6696 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search. | |
6697 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only | |
6698 be found in the retry. | |
6699 | |
22 | 6700 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second, |
7 | 6701 linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value |
6702 of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be | |
6703 case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in | |
6704 the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6705 5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6706 for this as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6707 to work. |
7 | 6708 |
6709 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match | |
6710 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags | |
6711 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off. | |
6712 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on | |
6713 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above | |
6714 must be included in the tags file. | |
6715 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g., | |
6716 command-line completion and ":help"). | |
6717 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions} | |
6718 | |
6719 *'taglength'* *'tl'* | |
6720 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0) | |
6721 global | |
6722 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters. | |
6723 | |
6724 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'* | |
6725 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
6726 global | |
6727 {not in Vi} | |
824 | 6728 If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that |
6729 tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is. | |
7 | 6730 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
6731 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6732 | |
6733 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433* | |
6734 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with | |
6735 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS") | |
6736 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
6737 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To | |
6738 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash | |
6739 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes). | |
6740 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path | |
6741 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in | |
6742 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see | |
6743 |tags-option|. | |
6744 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in | |
6745 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. {not available when compiled | |
6746 without the |+path_extra| feature} | |
515 | 6747 The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names |
6748 actually used. | |
7 | 6749 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag |
6750 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The | |
6751 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case | |
6752 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags| | |
6753 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
6754 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
6755 uses another default. | |
6756 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"} | |
6757 | |
6758 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'* | |
6759 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on) | |
6760 global | |
6761 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
6762 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or | |
6763 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the | |
6764 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or | |
6765 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified | |
6766 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry. | |
6767 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a | |
6768 mapping which should not change the tagstack. | |
6769 | |
6770 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531* | |
6771 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails: | |
6772 in the GUI: "builtin_gui" | |
6773 on Amiga: "amiga" | |
6774 on BeOS: "beos-ansi" | |
6775 on Mac: "mac-ansi" | |
6776 on MiNT: "vt52" | |
6777 on MS-DOS: "pcterm" | |
6778 on OS/2: "os2ansi" | |
6779 on Unix: "ansi" | |
6780 on VMS: "ansi" | |
6781 on Win 32: "win32") | |
6782 global | |
6783 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control | |
6784 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
6785 For example: > | |
6786 :set term=$TERM | |
6787 < See |termcap|. | |
6788 | |
6789 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'* | |
6790 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'* | |
6791 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm") | |
6792 global | |
6793 {not in Vi} | |
6794 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
6795 feature} | |
6796 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified | |
6797 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping | |
6798 that some languages (such as Arabic) require. | |
6799 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when | |
6800 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored. | |
6801 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that | |
6802 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically. | |
6803 This option is reset when the GUI is started. | |
6804 For further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
6805 | |
6806 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'* | |
6807 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with | |
6808 Macintosh GUI: "macroman") | |
6809 global | |
6810 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
6811 feature} | |
6812 {not in Vi} | |
6813 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character | |
6814 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For | |
6815 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the | |
1152 | 6816 display). Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then |
6817 'termencoding' should be "macroman". | |
7 | 6818 In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage |
6819 when it differs from the ANSI codepage. | |
6820 *E617* | |
6821 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been | |
6822 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8". | |
6823 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error | |
6824 message is shown. | |
6825 For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters, | |
6826 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters. | |
6827 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option. | |
6828 This is the normal value. | |
6829 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See | |
6830 |encoding-table|. | |
6831 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or | |
6832 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you | |
6833 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters. | |
6834 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and | |
6835 want to edit a UTF-8 file: > | |
6836 :let &termencoding = &encoding | |
6837 :set encoding=utf-8 | |
6838 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8. | |
6839 | |
6840 *'terse'* *'noterse'* | |
6841 'terse' boolean (default off) | |
6842 global | |
6843 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message | |
6844 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being | |
6845 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi | |
6846 shortens a lot of messages} | |
6847 | |
6848 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'* | |
6849 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
6850 global | |
6851 {not in Vi} | |
6852 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'. | |
6853 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is | |
6854 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is | |
6855 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty. | |
6856 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
6857 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
6858 | |
6859 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'* | |
6860 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on, | |
6861 others: default off) | |
6862 local to buffer | |
6863 {not in Vi} | |
6864 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'. | |
6865 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is | |
6866 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to | |
6867 "unix". | |
6868 | |
6869 *'textwidth'* *'tw'* | |
6870 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0) | |
6871 local to buffer | |
6872 {not in Vi} | |
6873 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be | |
6874 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables | |
10 | 6875 this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When |
6876 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also | |
7 | 6877 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. |
838 | 6878 When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line. |
7 | 6879 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
6880 | |
6881 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'* | |
6882 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "") | |
6883 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
6884 {not in Vi} | |
6885 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
10 | 6886 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in |
7 | 6887 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by |
6888 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line | |
6889 length is 510 bytes. | |
6890 To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at | |
6891 http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk . | |
10 | 6892 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 6893 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
6894 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
6895 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
6896 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
6897 uses another default. | |
6898 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
6899 | |
6900 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'* | |
6901 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off) | |
6902 global | |
6903 {not in Vi} | |
6904 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator. | |
6905 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6906 | |
6907 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'* | |
6908 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on) | |
6909 global | |
6910 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'* | |
6911 'ttimeout' boolean (default off) | |
6912 global | |
6913 {not in Vi} | |
6914 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a | |
6915 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received: | |
6916 | |
6917 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~ | |
6918 off off do not time out | |
6919 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes | |
6920 off on time out on key codes | |
6921 | |
6922 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete | |
6923 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there | |
6924 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For | |
6925 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next | |
6926 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'. | |
6927 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for | |
6928 the next character to arrive. After that the already received | |
6929 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can | |
6930 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option. | |
6931 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause | |
6932 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits | |
6933 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start | |
6934 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have | |
6935 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key | |
6936 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and | |
6937 reset the 'timeout' option. | |
6938 | |
6939 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6940 | |
6941 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'* | |
6942 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000) | |
6943 global | |
6944 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
6945 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'* | |
6946 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1) | |
6947 global | |
6948 {not in Vi} | |
6949 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key | |
6950 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G | |
6951 when part of a command has been typed. | |
6952 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a | |
6953 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to | |
6954 a non-negative number. | |
6955 | |
6956 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~ | |
6957 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen' | |
6958 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen' | |
6959 | |
6960 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options | |
6961 tell so. A useful setting would be > | |
6962 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100 | |
6963 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after | |
6964 a tenth of a second). | |
6965 | |
6966 *'title'* *'notitle'* | |
6967 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
6968 global | |
6969 {not in Vi} | |
6970 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
6971 feature} | |
6972 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of | |
6973 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to: | |
6974 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM | |
6975 Where: | |
6976 filename the name of the file being edited | |
6977 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off | |
6978 + indicates the file was modified | |
6979 = indicates the file is read-only | |
6980 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified | |
6981 (path) is the path of the file being edited | |
6982 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM" | |
6983 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles | |
6984 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and | |
6985 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and | |
6986 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap). | |
6987 *X11* | |
6988 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
6989 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11" | |
6990 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also | |
6991 works for the icon name |'icon'|. | |
6992 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title | |
6993 will not work (except in the GUI). | |
6994 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'. | |
6995 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then. | |
6996 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command: | |
6997 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY & | |
6998 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the | |
6999 title of the window should change back to what it should be after | |
7000 exiting Vim. | |
7001 | |
7002 *'titlelen'* | |
7003 'titlelen' number (default 85) | |
7004 global | |
7005 {not in Vi} | |
7006 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
7007 feature} | |
7008 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window | |
10 | 7009 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is |
7010 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this. | |
7 | 7011 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But |
7012 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters | |
7013 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title | |
7014 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise, | |
7015 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used. | |
7016 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option. | |
7017 | |
7018 *'titleold'* | |
7019 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim") | |
7020 global | |
7021 {not in Vi} | |
7022 {only available when compiled with the |+title| | |
7023 feature} | |
7024 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the | |
7025 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or | |
7026 'titlestring' is not empty. | |
36 | 7027 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
7028 security reasons. | |
7 | 7029 *'titlestring'* |
7030 'titlestring' string (default "") | |
7031 global | |
7032 {not in Vi} | |
7033 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
7034 feature} | |
7035 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the | |
7036 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on. | |
7037 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently | |
7038 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a | |
7039 non-empty 't_ts' option). | |
7040 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
7041 be restored if possible |X11|. | |
7042 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be | |
7043 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. | |
7044 Example: > | |
7045 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p") | |
7046 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70 | |
7047 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right | |
7048 of the available space. | |
7049 Some people prefer to have the file name first: > | |
7050 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%) | |
7051 < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file, | |
10 | 7052 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a |
7 | 7053 separating space only when needed. |
7054 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display | |
7055 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character). | |
7056 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
7057 | |
7058 *'toolbar'* *'tb'* | |
7059 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips") | |
7060 global | |
7061 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and | |
7062 |+GUI_Photon|} | |
10 | 7063 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The |
7 | 7064 possible values are: |
7065 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons. | |
7066 text Toolbar buttons shown with text. | |
7067 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are | |
10 | 7068 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI} |
7 | 7069 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons. |
7070 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse | |
7071 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment. | |
7072 | |
7073 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the | |
7074 following: > | |
7075 :set tb=icons,text | |
7076 < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They | |
7077 will show icons if both are requested. | |
7078 | |
7079 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if | |
7080 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable | |
7081 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: > | |
7082 :set guioptions-=T | |
7083 < Also see |gui-toolbar|. | |
7084 | |
7085 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'* | |
7086 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small") | |
7087 global | |
7088 {not in Vi} | |
7089 {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI} | |
7090 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are: | |
7091 tiny Use tiny toolbar icons. | |
7092 small Use small toolbar icons (default). | |
7093 medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons. | |
7094 large Use large toolbar icons. | |
7095 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on | |
7096 the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24, | |
7097 small=20x20 and tiny=16x16. | |
7098 | |
7099 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined | |
7100 by user preferences or the current theme is used. | |
7101 | |
7102 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'* | |
7103 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on) | |
7104 global | |
7105 {not in Vi} | |
7106 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones. | |
7107 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones. | |
7108 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for | |
7109 the change to take effect, for example: > | |
7110 :set notbi term=$TERM | |
7111 < See also |termcap|. | |
7112 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin | |
7113 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty | |
7114 xterm entries...). | |
7115 | |
7116 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'* | |
7117 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm, | |
7118 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or | |
7119 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in | |
7120 a DOS console) | |
7121 global | |
7122 {not in Vi} | |
7123 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to | |
7124 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line | |
7125 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple | |
7126 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region. | |
7127 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen | |
7128 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the | |
7129 mouse in an xterm and other terminals. | |
7130 | |
7131 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'* | |
7132 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term') | |
7133 global | |
7134 {not in Vi} | |
7135 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not | |
7136 available when compiled without |+mouse|} | |
7137 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized. | |
1213 | 7138 Currently these strings are valid: |
7 | 7139 *xterm-mouse* |
7140 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
7141 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes: | |
7142 "s" = button state | |
7143 "c" = column plus 33 | |
7144 "r" = row plus 33 | |
856 | 7145 This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec" for a |
189 | 7146 solution. |
7 | 7147 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the |
7148 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works | |
7149 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at | |
180 | 7150 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to |
7 | 7151 work. See below for how Vim detects this |
7152 automatically. | |
7153 *netterm-mouse* | |
7154 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
7155 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers | |
7156 for the row and column. | |
7157 *dec-mouse* | |
7158 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a | |
7159 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[". | |
189 | 7160 This is also available for an Xterm, if it was |
7161 configured with "--enable-dec-locator". | |
7 | 7162 *jsbterm-mouse* |
7163 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling. | |
7164 *pterm-mouse* | |
7165 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling. | |
7166 | |
7167 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm| | |
7168 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|. | |
7169 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always | |
7170 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes | |
7171 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not | |
7172 "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict). | |
7173 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is | |
7174 set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm" | |
7175 or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to | |
7176 "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can | |
7177 handle xterm mouse codes. | |
7178 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be | |
1621 | 7179 95 or higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse| |
7 | 7180 feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the |
7181 xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly. | |
7182 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set | |
7183 t_RV to an empty string: > | |
7184 :set t_RV= | |
7185 < | |
7186 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'* | |
7187 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999) | |
7188 global | |
7189 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines | |
7190 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is | |
7191 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number, | |
7192 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying. | |
7193 | |
7194 *'ttytype'* *'tty'* | |
7195 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM) | |
7196 global | |
7197 Alias for 'term', see above. | |
7198 | |
7199 *'undolevels'* *'ul'* | |
7200 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS, | |
7201 Win32 and OS/2) | |
7202 global | |
7203 {not in Vi} | |
7204 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information | |
7205 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used | |
7206 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory). | |
7207 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes | |
7208 itself: > | |
7209 set ul=0 | |
7210 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in | |
7211 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo. | |
7212 Set to a negative number for no undo at all: > | |
7213 set ul=-1 | |
7214 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change. | |
7215 Also see |undo-two-ways|. | |
7216 | |
7217 *'updatecount'* *'uc'* | |
7218 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200) | |
7219 global | |
7220 {not in Vi} | |
7221 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to | |
7222 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on | |
7223 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting | |
7224 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly | |
7225 mode this option will be initialized to 10000. | |
7226 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|. | |
7227 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are | |
7228 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount' | |
7229 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted. | |
7230 Also see |'swapsync'|. | |
7231 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile" | |
7232 or "nowrite". | |
7233 | |
7234 *'updatetime'* *'ut'* | |
7235 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000) | |
7236 global | |
7237 {not in Vi} | |
7238 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be | |
7239 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the | |
7240 |CursorHold| autocommand event. | |
7241 | |
7242 *'verbose'* *'vbs'* | |
7243 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0) | |
7244 global | |
7245 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean | |
7246 verbose option} | |
7247 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing. | |
7248 Currently, these messages are given: | |
7249 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written. | |
7250 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed. | |
712 | 7251 >= 5 Every searched tags file and include file. |
7 | 7252 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed. |
7253 >= 9 Every executed autocommand. | |
7254 >= 12 Every executed function. | |
7255 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded. | |
7256 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause. | |
7257 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters). | |
7258 | |
7259 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|. | |
7260 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command. | |
7261 | |
293 | 7262 When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not |
7263 displayed. | |
7264 | |
7265 *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'* | |
7266 'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty) | |
7267 global | |
7268 {not in Vi} | |
7269 When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name. | |
7270 When the file exists messages are appended. | |
7271 Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made | |
7272 empty. | |
7273 Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first. | |
7274 The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not | |
7275 displayed when 'verbosefile' is set. | |
7276 | |
7 | 7277 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'* |
7278 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32: | |
7279 "$VIM/vimfiles/view", | |
7280 for Unix: "~/.vim/view", | |
7281 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view" | |
7282 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view" | |
7283 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view") | |
7284 global | |
7285 {not in Vi} | |
7286 {not available when compiled without the +mksession | |
7287 feature} | |
7288 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|. | |
7289 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
7290 security reasons. | |
7291 | |
7292 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'* | |
7293 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor") | |
7294 global | |
7295 {not in Vi} | |
7296 {not available when compiled without the +mksession | |
7297 feature} | |
7298 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated | |
10 | 7299 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something: |
7 | 7300 word save and restore ~ |
7301 cursor cursor position in file and in window | |
7302 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
7303 fold options | |
7304 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
7305 global values for local options) | |
7306 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward | |
7307 slashes | |
7308 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when | |
7309 on Windows or DOS | |
7310 | |
7311 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files | |
7312 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
7313 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
7314 | |
7315 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528* | |
7316 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS, | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7317 Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7318 for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7319 for others: '100,<50,s10,h) |
7 | 7320 global |
7321 {not in Vi} | |
7322 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| | |
7323 feature} | |
7324 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written | |
10 | 7325 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma |
7 | 7326 separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character |
7327 identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string | |
7328 which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular | |
7329 character is left out, then the default value is used for that | |
7330 parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and | |
7331 the effect of their value. | |
7332 CHAR VALUE ~ | |
7333 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start | |
7334 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase | |
7335 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis" | |
75 | 7336 and "_K_L_M" are not. Only String and Number types are |
7337 stored. | |
7 | 7338 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of |
7339 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a | |
7340 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the | |
7341 start of a comment! | |
7342 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is | |
7343 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not | |
7344 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the | |
10 | 7345 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers |
7 | 7346 without a file name and buffers for help files are not written |
7347 to the viminfo file. | |
23 | 7348 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum |
7349 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all | |
7350 buffers are stored. | |
7 | 7351 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks |
7352 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when | |
7353 'viminfo' is non-empty. | |
7354 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the | |
7355 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file. | |
7356 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be | |
10 | 7357 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute |
7 | 7358 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of |
7359 'history' is used. | |
7360 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be | |
10 | 7361 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
7 | 7362 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then |
7363 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are | |
7364 saved. '"' is the old name for this item. | |
7365 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte. | |
7366 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be | |
10 | 7367 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
7 | 7368 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the |
7369 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current | |
233 | 7370 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|. |
7 | 7371 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0 |
7372 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when | |
10 | 7373 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current |
7 | 7374 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo"). |
7375 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo | |
7376 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch" | |
7377 has been used since the last search command. | |
7378 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow | |
7379 the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was | |
7380 given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one | |
7381 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded | |
7382 when opening the file, not when setting the option. | |
7383 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next | |
7384 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each | |
7385 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be | |
7386 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you | |
7387 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can | |
7388 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is | |
7389 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50 | |
7390 characters. | |
7391 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are | |
7392 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default | |
7393 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text. | |
7394 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit. | |
7395 | |
7396 Example: > | |
7397 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo | |
7398 < | |
7399 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you | |
7400 edited. | |
7401 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be | |
7402 remembered. | |
7403 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped. | |
7404 :0 Command-line history will not be saved. | |
7405 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo". | |
7406 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used, | |
7407 that is, save all of the search history, and also the | |
7408 previous search and substitute patterns. | |
7409 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back. | |
7410 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored. | |
7411 | |
7412 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to | |
7413 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically. | |
7414 | |
7415 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
7416 security reasons. | |
7417 | |
7418 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'* | |
7419 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "") | |
7420 global | |
7421 {not in Vi} | |
7422 {not available when compiled without the | |
7423 |+virtualedit| feature} | |
7424 A comma separated list of these words: | |
7425 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode. | |
7426 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode. | |
7427 all Allow virtual editing in all modes. | |
772 | 7428 onemore Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line |
782 | 7429 |
7 | 7430 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is |
1263 | 7431 no actual character. This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end |
7 | 7432 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and |
7433 editing a table. | |
772 | 7434 "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just |
7435 after the last character of the line. This makes some commands more | |
7436 consistent. Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line | |
7437 if the line was empty. But it is far from Vi compatible. It may also | |
782 | 7438 break some plugins or Vim scripts. For example because |l| can move |
7439 the cursor after the last character. Use with care! | |
7440 Using the |$| command will move to the last character in the line, not | |
7441 past it. This may actually move the cursor to the left! | |
772 | 7442 It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will |
7443 not get a warning for it. | |
7 | 7444 |
7445 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep* | |
7446 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off) | |
7447 global | |
7448 {not in Vi} | |
7449 Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the | |
7450 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted, | |
7451 use ":set vb t_vb=". | |
7452 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You | |
7453 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|. | |
7454 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display | |
7455 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f", | |
7456 where 40 is the time in msec. | |
7457 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash. | |
7458 Also see 'errorbells'. | |
7459 | |
7460 *'warn'* *'nowarn'* | |
7461 'warn' boolean (default on) | |
7462 global | |
7463 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer | |
7464 has been changed. | |
7465 | |
7466 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'* | |
7467 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off) | |
7468 global | |
7469 {not in Vi} | |
667 | 7470 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option. |
7 | 7471 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x. |
7472 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and | |
7473 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running. | |
7474 | |
7475 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'* | |
7476 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "") | |
7477 global | |
7478 {not in Vi} | |
7479 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the | |
7480 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in | |
7481 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys: | |
7482 char key mode ~ | |
7483 b <BS> Normal and Visual | |
7484 s <Space> Normal and Visual | |
712 | 7485 h "h" Normal and Visual (not recommended) |
7486 l "l" Normal and Visual (not recommended) | |
7 | 7487 < <Left> Normal and Visual |
7488 > <Right> Normal and Visual | |
7489 ~ "~" Normal | |
7490 [ <Left> Insert and Replace | |
7491 ] <Right> Insert and Replace | |
7492 For example: > | |
7493 :set ww=<,>,[,] | |
7494 < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used. | |
7495 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change | |
7496 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h" | |
7497 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This | |
7498 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and | |
7499 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping | |
7500 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the | |
7501 cursor. | |
714 | 7502 When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a |
7503 line then it will not move to the next line. This makes "dl", "cl", | |
7504 "yl" etc. work normally. | |
7 | 7505 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7506 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7507 | |
7508 *'wildchar'* *'wc'* | |
7509 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E) | |
7510 global | |
7511 {not in Vi} | |
7512 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the | |
7513 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'. | |
1621 | 7514 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 7515 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See |
7516 'wildcharm' for that. | |
7517 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: > | |
7518 :set wc=<Esc> | |
7519 < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
7520 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7521 | |
7522 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'* | |
7523 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0)) | |
7524 global | |
7525 {not in Vi} | |
7526 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is | |
233 | 7527 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line |
7528 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally | |
7 | 7529 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that |
7530 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: > | |
7531 :set wcm=<C-Z> | |
1621 | 7532 :cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z> |
7 | 7533 < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N. |
7534 | |
7535 *'wildignore'* *'wig'* | |
7536 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "") | |
7537 global | |
7538 {not in Vi} | |
7539 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
7540 feature} | |
7541 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these | |
1754 | 7542 patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names, and |
7543 influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless | |
7544 a flag is passed to disable this. | |
7 | 7545 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. |
7546 Also see 'suffixes'. | |
7547 Example: > | |
7548 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj | |
7549 < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7550 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7551 uses another default. | |
7552 | |
7553 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'* | |
7554 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off) | |
7555 global | |
7556 {not in Vi} | |
7557 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu| | |
7558 feature} | |
7559 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced | |
7560 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion, | |
7561 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the | |
7562 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is | |
7563 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or | |
7564 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match. | |
7565 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is | |
7566 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode. | |
7567 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on | |
7568 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls | |
7569 as needed. | |
7570 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used | |
7571 for selecting a completion. | |
7572 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special | |
7573 meanings: | |
7574 | |
7575 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N) | |
7576 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a | |
7577 subdirectory or submenu. | |
7578 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a | |
7579 dot: move into a submenu. | |
7580 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into | |
7581 parent directory or parent menu. | |
7582 | |
7583 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|. | |
7584 | |
7585 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead | |
7586 of selecting a different match, use this: > | |
7587 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left> | |
7588 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right> | |
7589 < | |
7590 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match | |
7591 |hl-WildMenu|. | |
7592 | |
7593 *'wildmode'* *'wim'* | |
7594 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full") | |
7595 global | |
7596 {not in Vi} | |
7597 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with | |
10 | 7598 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each |
1152 | 7599 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'. The |
7 | 7600 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar', |
7601 The second part for the second use, etc. | |
7602 These are the possible values for each part: | |
7603 "" Complete only the first match. | |
7604 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match, | |
7605 the original string is used and then the first match | |
7606 again. | |
7607 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't | |
7608 result in a longer string, use the next part. | |
7609 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is | |
7610 enabled. | |
7611 "list" When more than one match, list all matches. | |
7612 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
7613 complete first match. | |
7614 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
7615 complete till longest common string. | |
7616 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases. | |
7617 | |
7618 Examples: > | |
7619 :set wildmode=full | |
233 | 7620 < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) > |
7 | 7621 :set wildmode=longest,full |
7622 < Complete longest common string, then each full match > | |
7623 :set wildmode=list:full | |
7624 < List all matches and complete each full match > | |
7625 :set wildmode=list,full | |
7626 < List all matches without completing, then each full match > | |
7627 :set wildmode=longest,list | |
7628 < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives. | |
1621 | 7629 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 7630 |
40 | 7631 *'wildoptions'* *'wop'* |
7632 'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "") | |
7633 global | |
7634 {not in Vi} | |
7635 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
7636 feature} | |
7637 A list of words that change how command line completion is done. | |
7638 Currently only one word is allowed: | |
7639 tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of | |
856 | 7640 tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match |
40 | 7641 is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are: |
7642 d #define | |
7643 f function | |
7644 Also see |cmdline-completion|. | |
7645 | |
7 | 7646 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'* |
7647 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu") | |
7648 global | |
7649 {not in Vi} | |
7650 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI} | |
7651 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT | |
7652 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the | |
7653 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and | |
7654 entering special characters. This option tells what to do: | |
7655 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be | |
7656 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be | |
7657 done with the |:simalt| command. | |
7658 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key | |
7659 combinations cannot be mapped. | |
7660 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu | |
10 | 7661 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other |
7 | 7662 keys can be mapped. |
7663 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT | |
7664 key is never used for the menu. | |
36 | 7665 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will |
7666 select the menu, unless it has been mapped. | |
7 | 7667 |
164 | 7668 *'window'* *'wi'* |
7669 'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1) | |
7670 global | |
7671 Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, | |
7672 use 'lines' for that. | |
179 | 7673 Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the |
7674 value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll | |
7675 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one. | |
164 | 7676 When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll |
7677 in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines. | |
7678 When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than | |
7679 or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1. | |
7680 {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines} | |
7681 | |
7 | 7682 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591* |
7683 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1) | |
7684 global | |
7685 {not in Vi} | |
7686 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
7687 feature} | |
7688 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard | |
10 | 7689 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the |
1621 | 7690 focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the |
7691 cost of the height of other windows. | |
7692 Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing. | |
7693 Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen. | |
7694 Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high. This has the drawback | |
7695 that ":all" will create only two windows. To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4" | |
7696 to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done, | |
7697 using the |VimEnter| event: > | |
7698 au VimEnter * set winheight=999 | |
7699 < Minimum value is 1. | |
7700 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the | |
7 | 7701 height of the current window. |
7702 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set | |
7703 the minimal height for other windows. | |
7704 | |
7705 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'* | |
7706 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off) | |
7707 local to window | |
7708 {not in Vi} | |
7709 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
7710 feature} | |
7711 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 7712 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. Set by default for the |
7713 |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|. | |
7 | 7714 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
7715 | |
782 | 7716 *'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'* |
7717 'winfixwidth' 'wfw' boolean (default off) | |
7718 local to window | |
7719 {not in Vi} | |
7720 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
7721 feature} | |
7722 Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 7723 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. |
782 | 7724 The width may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
7725 | |
7 | 7726 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'* |
7727 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1) | |
7728 global | |
7729 {not in Vi} | |
7730 {not available when compiled without the +windows | |
7731 feature} | |
7732 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
7733 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
7734 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a | |
7735 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when | |
7736 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.) | |
7737 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window. | |
7738 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
7739 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
7740 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable. | |
7741 | |
7742 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'* | |
7743 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1) | |
7744 global | |
7745 {not in Vi} | |
7746 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit | |
7747 feature} | |
7748 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
7749 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
7750 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just | |
7751 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one | |
7752 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere | |
7753 to go.) | |
7754 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window. | |
7755 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
7756 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
7757 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable. | |
7758 | |
7759 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592* | |
7760 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20) | |
7761 global | |
7762 {not in Vi} | |
7763 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit | |
7764 feature} | |
7765 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard | |
7766 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If | |
7767 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of | |
7768 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window | |
7769 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing. | |
7770 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the | |
7771 width of the current window. | |
7772 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set | |
7773 the minimal width for other windows. | |
7774 | |
7775 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'* | |
7776 'wrap' boolean (default on) | |
7777 local to window | |
7778 {not in Vi} | |
7779 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text | |
7780 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that. | |
7781 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and | |
10 | 7782 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap |
7783 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is | |
7 | 7784 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll |
7785 horizontally. | |
7786 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See | |
7787 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary. | |
7788 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: > | |
7789 :set sidescroll=5 | |
7790 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:> | |
7791 < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7792 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7793 on. |
7 | 7794 |
7795 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'* | |
7796 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0) | |
7797 local to buffer | |
7798 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping | |
7799 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted | |
7800 and inserting continues on the next line. | |
7801 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause | |
7802 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible. | |
7803 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used. | |
7804 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently | |
7805 and less usefully} | |
7806 | |
7807 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'* | |
7808 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385* | |
7809 global | |
500 | 7810 Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to |]s| and |
7811 |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes. | |
7 | 7812 |
7813 *'write'* *'nowrite'* | |
7814 'write' boolean (default on) | |
7815 global | |
7816 {not in Vi} | |
7817 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed. | |
7818 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are | |
10 | 7819 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line |
7 | 7820 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires |
7821 writing a temporary file. | |
7822 | |
7823 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'* | |
7824 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off) | |
7825 global | |
7826 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override. | |
7827 | |
7828 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'* | |
7829 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off | |
7830 otherwise) | |
7831 global | |
7832 {not in Vi} | |
7833 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after | |
7834 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is | |
7835 also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See | |
7836 |backup-table| for another explanation. | |
7837 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. | |
7838 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is | |
7839 set. | |
7840 | |
7841 *'writedelay'* *'wd'* | |
7842 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0) | |
7843 global | |
7844 {not in Vi} | |
7845 The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the | |
7846 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by | |
7847 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes. | |
7848 | |
7849 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |